TABLE OF CONTENTS
SECTION
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6
7
7
8
8
9
9
10
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
WARNING!
This manual has been prepared with the assistance of
service and engineering specialists to acquaint you with
the operation and maintenance of your new vehicle. It is
supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet and
various customer oriented documents. You are urged to
read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-
tions and recommendations in this manual will help
assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm. In addition,
certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain prod-
ucts of component wear contain or emit chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient reference and remain with
the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will be
aware of all safety warnings.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the table of contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
When it comes to service, remember that your dealer
knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained techni-
cians and genuine Mopar parts, and is interested in
your satisfaction.
The detailed index, at the rear of this manual, contains a
complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this owner’s manual:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INTRODUCTION
5
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This manual contains WARNINGS against operating
procedures which could result in an accident or bodily
injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures
which could result in damage to your vehicle. If you do
not read this entire manual you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
driver’s front corner of the instrument panel, visible
through the windshield. This number also appears on the
vehicle registration or title.
Vehicle Identification Number
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
Wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
(Rear Doors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
Ignition Key Removal
The dealer that sold you your new vehicle has the key
code numbers for your vehicle locks. These numbers can
be used to order duplicate keys from your dealer. Ask
your dealer for these numbers and keep them in a safe
place.
Automatic Transaxle
Place the shift lever in PARK and make sure that the shift
knob push button has returned to the out position. Turn
the ignition switch to the OFF position, then to the LOCK
position, and remove the key.
The double sided keys
may be inserted into the
locks with either side up.
Vehicle Key
Ignition Key Positions
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily
in the ignition cylinder. If this occurs, rotate the key to the
right slightly, then remove the key as described. If a
malfunction occurs, the system will trap the key in the
ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety feature is
inoperable. The engine can be started and stopped but
the key cannot be removed until you obtain service.
2
Manual Transaxle
Depress and hold the release button located between the
ignition switch and the instrument panel. Turn the igni-
tion switch to the LOCK position and remove the key.
Ignition Key Release Button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locking Doors With The Key
WARNING!
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key rearward, to unlock the door, turn the
key forward. See Section 7 of this manual for door lock
lubrication.
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is danger-
ous for a number of reasons. A child or others could
be injured. Children should be warned not to touch
the parking brake, brake pedal or the gear selector
lever. Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child
could operate power windows, other controls, or
move the vehicle.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition,
sounds a signal to remind you to remove the key.
NOTE: With the driver’s door open, and the key in the
ignition, the power door locks will not function.
CAUTION!
SENTRY KEY
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unautho-
rized operation of the vehicle by disabling the engine.
The system will shut the engine off after 2 seconds of
running if an invalid key is used to start the vehicle. This
system utilizes ignition keys which have an electronic
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove key from the ignition and lock all doors
when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15
chip (transponder) embedded into them. Only keys that
have been programmed to the vehicle can be used to start
and operate the vehicle.
If the Theft Alarm/ Immobilizer Light comes on during
normal vehicle operation (vehicle has been running for
longer than 10 seconds), a fault has been detected in the
electronics and the vehicle should be serviced as soon as
possible.
2
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System does not need to be
armed or activated. Operation of the system is automatic
regardless of whether or not the vehicle is locked or
unlocked. During normal operation, the Theft Alarm/
Immobilizer Light will come on for three (3) seconds
immediately after the ignition switch is turned on for a
bulb check. Afterwards, if the bulb remains on, this
indicates a problem with the electronics.
NOTE:
•
The Sentry Key Immobilizer System is not compatible
with remote starting systems. Use of these systems
may result in vehicle starting problems and loss of
security protection.
•
Exxon/ Mobil Speed Pass,™ additional Sentry Keys, or
any other transponder equipped components on the
same keychain will not cause a key-related (transpon-
der) fault unless the additional part is physically held
against the ignition key being used when starting the
vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other RF electronics
will not cause interference with this system.
If the bulb begins to flash after the bulb check, this
indicates that an invalid key has been used to start the
vehicle. Both of these conditions will result in the engine
being shut off after two (2) seconds of running.
Keep in mind that a key which has not been programmed
is also considered an invalid key even if it is cut to fit the
ignition lock cylinder for that vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
NOTE:
When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to the
dealer.
Replacement Keys
Sentry Key Programming
You can program new keys to the system if you have two
valid sentry keys by performing the following procedure:
NOTE: Only keys that have been programmed to the
vehicle electronics can be used to start the vehicle. Once
a Sentry Key has been programmed to a vehicle, it can
not be programmed to any other vehicle.
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key Transponder blank(s) to
match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four digit PIN number. This number is required
for dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may
be performed at an authorized dealer or by using the
Customer Key Programming procedure. This procedure
consists of programming a blank key to the vehicle
electronics. A blank key is one which has never been
programmed.
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON for at least 3 seconds but no
longer than 15 seconds. Turn the ignition switch OFF and
remove the first key.
3. Insert the second valid key and turn the ignition
switch ON within 15 seconds. After ten seconds a chime
will sound and the Theft Alarm Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch OFF and remove the second key.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key into the ignition switch and
turn the ignition switch ON within 60 seconds. After 10
seconds a single chime will sound. The Theft Alarm Light
will stop flashing, turn on for 3 seconds; then turn off.
STEERING WHEEL LOCK — IF EQUIPPED
Your vehicle may be equipped with a passive steering
wheel lock. This lock prevents steering the vehicle with-
out the ignition key. If the steering wheel is moved no
more than 1/ 2 turn in either direction and the key is not
in the ignition switch, the steering wheel will lock.
2
The new Sentry Key has been programmed.
Repeat this procedure to program up to a total of 8 keys.
If you do not have a programmed sentry key, contact
your dealer for details.
If You Wish To Manually Lock The Steering
Wheel:
With the engine running, turn the steering wheel upside
down, turn off the engine and remove the key. Turn the
steering wheel slightly in either direction until the lock
engages.
General Information
The Sentry Key system complies with FCC rules part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
To Release The Steering Wheel Lock:
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
Insert the key in the ignition switch and start the engine.
If the key is difficult to turn, move the wheel slightly to
the right or left to disengage the lock.
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If you turned the wheel to the right to engage
the lock, you must turn the wheel slightly to the right to
disengage it. If you turned the wheel to the left to engage
the lock, turn the wheel slightly to the left to disengage it.
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK and the shift knob push-button
is out. It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the
key is in the OFF, or ON positions.
DOOR LOCKS
Manual Door Locks
Door Lock Plunger
Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Therefore, make sure the
keys are not inside the vehicle before closing the door.
WARNING!
For personal security, and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as well
as when you park and leave the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19
Power Door Locks — If Equipped
A door lock switch is on each front door panel. Press this
WARNING!
switch to lock or unlock the doors.
When leaving the vehicle always remove the key
from the ignition lock, and lock your vehicle. Do not
leave children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised use of
vehicle equipment may cause severe personal inju-
ries and death.
2
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock
all of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Power Door Lock Switch
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Central Locking/Unlocking — If Equipped
4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have
successfully disabled the double activation feature.
All vehicle doors and liftgate are locked with the first
turn of the key to the LOCK position. The double unlock
activation feature requires you to turn the key in the
cylinder lock two times within five seconds to UNLOCK
all vehicle doors and liftgate at once. You may turn this
feature off and unlock all the doors and liftgate with one
turn of the key by following these instructions.
You can turn the feature back on by repeating the above
mentioned procedure.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The doors will lock automatically if:
1. all doors are closed,
NOTE: Steps 2 and 3 must be completed within 10
seconds.
2. vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/ h),
3. the accelerator pedal is depressed.
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition
switch.
The Automatic Door Locks can be enabled or disabled by
performing the following procedure:
2. Cycle the ignition switch ON/ OFF four times ending
in the OFF position.
NOTE: Steps 2 and 3 must be completed within 10
seconds.
3. Press the interior door lock switch to the UNLOCK
position.
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition
switch.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21
2. Cycle the ignition switch ON/ OFF four times ending
in the OFF position.
To use the system, open each rear door and move the
control UP to engage. When the system on a door is
engaged, that door can only be opened by using the
outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the
unlocked position.
3. Press the interior door lock switch to the LOCK
position.
2
4. A single chime will sound to signify that you have
successfully completed the programming.
You can turn the feature back on by repeating the above
mentioned procedure.
“Child-Protection” Door Lock System (Rear
Doors)
To provide a safer environment for children riding in the
rear seat, the rear doors have the “child-protection” door
lock system.
Child Lock Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock plunger up (unlocked position), roll down
window and open the door with the outside door handle.
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
activate the panic alarm from distances up to about 23
feet (7 meters) using a hand held transmitter. The trans-
mitter need not be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
Three Button Transmitter
To Unlock The Doors and Liftgate:
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the key fob
once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice within five
seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate, the park lights
will also flash twice. The interior lights also come on and
remain on for about 30 seconds when you unlock the
doors.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23
NOTE: You may turn off this feature and unlock all
doors with one press of the button by following the
procedure shown in the Central Locking/ Unlocking
paragraph.
3. Continue to hold the Unlock button and press the
Lock button.
4. Release both buttons.
2
A chime will sound to signify that the process is com-
plete.
To Lock The Doors:
Press and release the LOCK button to lock all doors and
liftgate. The park lights will flash and the horn will chirp
to acknowledge the signal.
Using The Panic Alarm:
To turn on the panic alarm feature, press and release the
PANIC button. When the panic alarm is on the headlights
and park lights will flash, the horn will pulse on and off
and the interior lights will turn on.
Horn Chirp Feature
The horn chirp that signals that the doors have been
locked can be turned on or off by using the following
procedure:
The panic alarm will stay on for 3 minutes unless you
press the PANIC button a second time, or until vehicle
speed reaches 15 mph (24 km/ h).
1. Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the
switch to the ON position.
NOTE: When you turn off the panic alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
the system.
2. Press and hold the Unlock button on the transmitter
for between four and ten seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Program Transmitters
5. Turn the ignition switch off to exit the transmitter
programming mode.
Up to four transmitters can be programmed to your
vehicle. Your new vehicle was shipped with two trans-
mitters. See your dealer for additional transmitters
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules part 15 and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
Additional transmitters can be programmed to the sys-
tem by using the following procedure:
1. Insert the key into the ignition switch and turn the
switch to the ON position.
•
•
This device may not cause harmful interference.
This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undes-
ired operation.
2. Press and hold the Unlock button on the transmitter
between four and ten seconds.
3. Continue to hold the Unlock button and press the
Panic button. A chime will sound to indicate that the
transmitter programming mode has been entered.
If your transmitter fails to operate from a normal dis-
tance, check for these two conditions.
1. Weak batteries in transmitter. The expected life of
batteries is from one to two years.
4. Press a button on all transmitters to be programmed to
the system, including any previously programmed trans-
mitters. A chime will sound when each transmitter has
been programmed.
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, and some mobile or CB radios.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25
Transmitter Battery Service
The recommended replacement battery is 2016 or its
equivalent.
2
NOTE: Do not touch the battery terminals that are on
the back housing or the printed circuit board.
1. With the transmitter buttons facing down, use a thin
coin to pry the two halves of the transmitter apart. Make
sure not to damage the rubber gasket during removal.
Separating Transmitter Halves
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. To reassemble the transmitter case snap two halves
together. Make sure there is an even gap between the two
halves. Test transmitter operation.
To set the alarm:
1. Remove the keys from the ignition switch and get out
of the vehicle.
SECURITY ALARM SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED
The system monitors the doors, liftgate, and ignition
switch for unauthorized operation.
2. Lock the door using either the door key, power door
lock switch, or the Keyless Entry Transmitter and close all
doors.
If something triggers the alarm, the system will signal for
about 18 minutes. For the first 3 minutes the horn will
sound and the headlights, park lights, tail lights and the
indicator light in the cluster will flash. Then the exterior
lights will flash for another 15 minutes.
3. The indicator light in the instrument cluster will flash
rapidly for 16 seconds. This shows that the system is
arming. During this period, if a door is opened, the
ignition switch is turned ON, or the power door locks are
unlocked in any manner, the system will automatically
disarm. After 16 seconds the indicator light will flash
slowly. This shows that the system is fully armed.
If the monitored system, which triggered the alarm is
deactivated the alarm will continue to sound until 3
minutes of alarm time is reached. If the monitored
system, which triggered the alarm is deactivated after the
alarm has been on for 3 minutes the alarm will shut off
immediately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27
To disarm the system:
Unlock a front door/ liftgate using either the key or the
Keyless Entry Transmitter.
Security System Manual Override
The system will not arm if you lock the doors using the
manual door lock plunger.
2
Starting the vehicle with a valid Sentry key will disarm
the system. A valid key is one that is programmed to that
particular vehicle. A valid key will disarm the system, an
invalid key will trigger the alarm.
Tamper Alert
If the horn sounds 3 times when you unlock a front door
using either a key or the Keyless Entry Transmitter, the
alarm has been activated. Check the vehicle for tamper-
ing.
Door Lock Plunger
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
LIFTGATE
NOTE: The key that is used to start the vehicle is also
used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate.
To unlock the liftgate, insert the key into the lock and
turn to the right. The liftgate can also be unlocked using
the remote keyless entry or by activating the power door
lock switches located on the front doors. The central
locking/ unlocking feature (if equipped) can also be acti-
vated from the liftgate key cylinder.
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed
without using the key. To open the liftgate, squeeze the
liftgate release touch pad located on the backside of the
liftgate handle and pull the liftgate open with one fluid
motion.
Liftgate Handle
NOTE: In the event of a power malfunction, or the
remote transmitter is inoperative, insert the key into the
liftgate lock cylinder and turn to the right. Using the
liftgate handle, pull the liftgate open with one fluid
motion.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29
EMERGENCY SEAT BACK RELEASE
WARNING!
•
•
Driving with the liftgate open can allow poison-
ous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
WARNING!
2
Do not allow children to have access to the liftgate
area with the rear shelf panel in position 1 (Top) or
position 2 (Middle), either by climbing into the
liftgate from outside, or through the inside of the
vehicle. Always close the liftgate when your vehicle
is unattended. Once in the liftgate area, young chil-
dren may not be able to escape, even if they entered
through the rear seat. If trapped in the liftgate,
children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.
If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with tempera-
ture, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
As a security measure, a Seat Back Emergency Release
lever is built into the left side rear seat back latching
mechanism. In the event of an individual being locked
inside the liftgate area with the rear shelf panel in
position 1 (Top) or position 2 (Middle), the left side rear
seat back can be unlatched by pulling down on the
glow-in-the-dark lever attached to the left rear seat back
latching mechanism.
Emergency Trunk Lid
Once unlatched the seat back can be pushed forward to
gain access into the interior of the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31
NOTE: Make sure that the elastic loop is around the
emergency release handle at all times. If the handle is
pulled downward, entirely through the elastic loop, the
handle will not return to its original position and the seat
back may not operate properly.
The window lock switch located between the window
switches allows you to disable the rear window switches
that are located at the back of the center floor console.
2
POWER WINDOWS
The power window switches are located on the instru-
ment panel above the A/ C controls. The top left switch
controls the left front window and the top right switch
controls the right front window.
The lower left switch controls the left rear passenger’s
window and the lower right switch controls the right rear
passenger’s window.
Power Window Switches
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Rear Window Switches
There are also rear passenger window switches located at
WARNING!
the rear of the center console near the floor.
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the win-
dows while operating the power window switches.
Such entrapment may result in serious injury or
death.
Auto Down Feature
The driver’s and passenger’s front window switches
have an auto down feature. Press the window switch past
the detent, release, and the window will go down auto-
matically. Press the switch a second time in either direc-
tion to stop the window.
Rear Power Window Switches
To open the window part way, press the window switch
part way and release it when you want the window to
stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33
Wind Buffeting
adult-size seat belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature
also, can be used to hold infant and child restraint
systems.
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting.
2
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-
led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or
other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the
vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your
vehicle are buckled up properly.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if
equipped, side airbags for both the driver and front
passenger. If you will be carrying children too small for
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
WARNING!
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
•
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with Lap/
Shoulder Belts.
Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
WARNING!
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
•
•
Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the
best.
2
Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You
might suffer internal injuries, or you could even
slide out of part of the belt. Follow these instruc-
tions to wear your seat belt safely and to keep
your passengers safe, too.
•
Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
Latch Plate To Buckle
Latch Plate
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will not
protect you properly. The lap portion could ride too
high on your body, possibly causing internal injuries.
Always buckle your belt into the buckle nearest you.
2
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well. In a
sudden stop you could move too far forward, increasing
the possibility of injury. Wear your seat belt snugly.
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous.
Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the vehicle
in a collision, increasing head and neck injury. A belt
worn under the arm can cause internal injuries. Ribs
aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear the belt over
your shoulder so that your strongest bones will take the
force in a collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect you
from injury during a collision. You are more likely to hit
your head in a collision if you do not wear your
shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt are meant to be
used together.
Removing Slack From Belt
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your
abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as pos-
sible and keep it snug.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision
and leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt
system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose
parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.
Do not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is straight.
If you can’t straighten a belt in your vehicle, take it
to your dealer and have it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39
Rear Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Retractor Lock-Out
This feature is designed to lock the retractor whenever
the rear seat back is not fully latched. This prevents
someone from wearing the rear center lap/ shoulder belt
when the rear seat back is not fully latched.
WARNING!
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
lock-out feature to ensure that the rear seat back is in
the fully upright and locked position when occu-
pied. If the rear seat back is not fully upright and
locked and the rear center lap/shoulder belt can be
pulled out of the retractor, the vehicle should imme-
diately be taken to your dealer for service. Failure to
follow this warning could result in serious or fatal
injury.
2
NOTE:
•
If the rear center lap/ shoulder belt can not be pulled
out, check that the rear seat back is fully latched.
•
If the rear seat back is properly latched and the rear
center lap/ shoulder belt still can not be pulled out, the
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR) system may be
activated. To reset this feature you must let all of the
belt webbing return into the retractor. You will not be
able to pull out more webbing until all of the webbing
has been returned back into the retractor.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the belt away from
your neck. Push up or down on the anchorage button to
release the anchorage, and move it up or down to the
position that serves you best.
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it up or down to make sure that
it is locked in position.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure
Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/
shoulder belt.
Adjusting Upper Shoulder Belt
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41
1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the
anchor point.
2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch
plate, grasp and twist the belt webbing 180° to create a
fold that begins immediately above the latch plate.
2
Positioning Latch Plate
Creating A Fold
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.
The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of the
latch plate.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag con-
trol module (see Airbag Section). Like the front airbags,
the pretensioners are single use items. After a collision
that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and preten-
sioners, both must be replaced.
Sliding The Latch Plate
4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the
folded webbing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
2
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) - Airbag
Front Airbag Components
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the vehicle is equipped with side airbags, they are
located inside the driver and front passenger seats, and
their covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
WARNING!
•
Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You
may damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags are not there to protect you.
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are in-
flating.
•
•
If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, do
not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the perfor-
mance could be adversely affected and/or objects
could be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, do
not attach cup holders or any other objects on or
around the door. The inflating side airbag could
drive the object into occupants, causing serious
injury.
Side Airbags
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along
with seat belts and pretensioners, front airbags work with
the instrument panel knee bolsters to provide improved
protection for the driver and front passenger. Side airbags
also work with seat belts to improve occupant protection.
Infants in rear facing child restraints should NEVER ride
in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger front airbag.
An airbag deployment can cause severe injury or death to
infants in that position.
2
Children that are not big enough to properly wear the
vehicle seat belt (see Section on Child Restraints) should
be secured in the rear seat in child restraints or belt-
positioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arm.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is equipped, the
side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in
moderate to severe side collisions. In certain types of
collisions, both the front and side airbags may be trig-
gered. But even in collisions where the airbags work, you
need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for
the airbags to protect you properly.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible, and use the proper child
restraint. Refer to the section on Child Restraint.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag.
1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride
buckled up in a rear seat.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder
belts properly.
WARNING!
•
Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belts even though you
have airbags.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags
room to inflate.
4. If your vehicle has side airbags, do not lean against
the door, airbags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
•
•
Being too close to the steering wheel or instru-
ment panel during front airbag deployment could
cause serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate.
Sit back, comfortably extending your arms to
reach the steering wheel or instrument panel.
If the vehicle has side airbags, they also need
room to inflate. Do not lean against the door. Sit
upright in the center of the seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47
The front airbag system consists of the following:
The Side Airbag System, on vehicles equipped, consists
of the following:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Front Airbag Control Module (ACM)
AIRBAG Readiness Light
•
AIRBAG Readiness Light (shared with the front airbag
system)
2
Driver and Passenger Front Airbag/ Inflator Units
Unique Steering Wheel and Column
Unique Instrument Panel
•
•
•
Side Airbag in the driver’s seat
Side Airbag in the passenger’s seat
Airbag Control Module (shared with the front airbag
system)
Interconnecting Wiring
Seat Belt Pretensioners
•
•
Side impact sensors
Knee Impact Bolster
Interconnecting Wiring
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
How The Airbag System Works
The front airbag control module also turns on
the AIRBAG light in the instrument panel for 6
to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first
turned ON, then turns the light off. If the front or side
airbag control modules detect a malfunction in any
part of the system, the airbag light will turn on either
momentarily or continuously.
•
The front airbag control module determines if a frontal
impact is severe enough to require the airbags to
inflate. The front control module will not detect side,
roll over, or rear collisions.
The front airbag control module also monitors the
readiness of the electronic parts of the system when-
ever the ignition switch is in the START or ON
positions. These include all of the items listed above
except the knee bolster, instrument panel and the
steering wheel and column. If the key is in the OFF
position, in the ACC position, or not in the ignition
switch, the airbags are not on and will not inflate.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG light in your instrument panel
could mean you won’t have the airbags to protect
you in a collision. If the light does not come on, stays
on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes on as you
drive, have the airbag system checked right away.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49
•
When the front airbag control module detects a colli-
sion requiring the front airbags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front airbags. The front airbag covers sepa-
rate and fold out of the way as the front airbags inflate
to their full size. The front airbags fully inflate in about
50 milliseconds. This is only about half of the time it
takes you to blink your eyes. The front airbags then
quickly deflate while helping to restrain the driver and
front passenger. The driver’s front airbag gas is vented
through the airbag material towards the instrument
panel. The passenger’s front airbag gas is vented
through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this
way the front airbags do not interfere with your
control of the vehicle.
Side Airbags Supplemental Restraint System
(SRS)—If Equipped
The side airbag control module determines if a side
collision is severe enough to require the side airbags to
inflate. The side airbag control module will not detect roll
over, front or rear collisions.
2
The Side Airbag Control Module monitors the readiness
of the electronic parts of the system whenever the igni-
tion switch is in the START or ON positions. These
include all of the items previously mentioned.
In moderate to severe side collisions, the side airbag
inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered,
releasing a quantity of nontoxic gas. The inflating side
airbag exits through the seat seam into the space between
the occupant and the door. The side airbag moves at a
very high speed and with such a high force, that it could
injure you if you are not seated properly, or if items are
positioned in the area where the side airbag inflates. This
especially applies to children.
•
The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees and
position you for the best interaction with the front
airbags.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If A Deployment Occurs
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the
airbag control modules detect a moderate-to-severe col-
lision, to help restrain the driver and front passenger, and
then immediately deflate.
•
•
As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instruc-
tions for cleaning.
NOTE: A collision that is not severe enough to need
airbag protection will not activate the system. This does
not mean something is wrong with the airbag system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
•
The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abra-
sions and/ or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags and seat belt pretensioners will
not be in place to protect you.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
Deployed airbags and seat belt pretensioners cannot
protect you in another collision. Have the airbags
and seat belt pretensioners replaced by an autho-
rized dealer as soon as possible.
WARNING!
2
•
Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured because the airbags are not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or
the upper right side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body struc-
ture, or frame.
•
•
You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee bolsters.
It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Light
Child Restraint
You will want to have the airbags ready to inflate for your
protection in a collision. While the airbag system is
designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following
occurs, have an authorized dealer service the system
immediately.
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all
times — babies and children, too. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
•
The AIRBAG light does not come on or flickers during
the 6 to 8 seconds when the ignition switch is first
turned on.
Children 12 years and under should ride properly buck-
led up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats, rather than in the front.
•
•
The light remains on or flickers after the 6 to 8 second
interval.
The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53
•
•
Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and ЉconvertibleЉ child seats. Both types of
child restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage
system.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny
baby, can become a missile inside the vehicle. The
force required to hold even an infant on your lap
could become so great that you could not hold the
child, no matter how strong you are. The child and
others could be badly injured. Any child riding in
your vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the
child’s size.
2
The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). ЉConvertibleЉ child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 9 kg (20 lbs) but are
less than one year old.
Infants And Small Children
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
•
The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weigh-
ing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s cushion
while the child’s back is against the seat back; they
should use a Belt Positioning Booster Seat. The child
and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped with a
front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap
portion.)
•
Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs (9 to 18 kg) and who
are older than one year. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/ shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system.
NOTE: For additional information refer to www.nhtsa-
.dot.gov or www.seatcheck.org.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it, before you buy it.
WARNING!
•
•
Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions ex-
actly when installing an infant or child restraint.
•
•
The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
2
Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
A rearward facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward facing child re-
straint in the front seat may be struck by a
deploying passenger airbag which may cause se-
vere or fatal injury to the infant.
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either
cinching latch plates or switchable seat belt retractors,
which are designed to keep the lap portion tight
around the child restraint so that it is not necessary to
use a locking clip. If the seat belt has a cinching latch
plate, pulling up on the shoulder portion of the
lap/ shoulder belt will tighten the belt. The cinching
latch plate will keep the belt tight, however, any seat
belt system will loosen with time, so check the belt
occasionally and pull it tight if necessary.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
•
Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
If the seat belt has a switchable retractor, it will have a
distinctive label.
•
When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
•
In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/ shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
Automatic-Locking Retractor (ALR)
Pull the belt from the retractor until there is enough to
allow you to pass through the child restraint and slide the
latch plate into the buckle. Then pull on the belt until it is
all removed from the retractor. Allow the belt to return
into the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to
tighten the lap portion about the child restraint. Follow
the instructions of the child restraint manufacture.
•
•
If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the buckle
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
NOTE: To reset this feature you must let all of the belt
webbing return into the retractor. You will not be able to
pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been
returned back into the retractor.
Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57
Lower Anchors and Tether for CHildren (LATCH)
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-
age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren. The LATCH system
provides for the installation of the child restraint without
using the vehicle seat belt. All three rear seating positions
have lower anchorages that are capable of accommodat-
ing LATCH-compatible child seats having flexible,
webbing-mounted lower attachments. Child seats with
fixed lower attachments must be installed in the out-
board positions only. Regardless of the specific type of
lower attachment, NEVER install LATCH-compatible
child seats such that two seats share a common lower
anchorage. If you are installing LATCH-compatible child
restraints in adjacent rear seating positions, you can use
the LATCH anchors or the vehicle’s seat belt for the
outboard position, but you must use the vehicle’s seat
belt at the center position. If your child restraints are not
LATCH-compatible, you can only install the child re-
straints using the vehicle’s seat belts. Please refer to,
Installing the Child Restraint System for typical installa-
tion instructions.
2
Latch Anchorages
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child restraints systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the top tether anchorage have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for
most older vehicles.
Installing the Child Restraint System
We urge that you carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting
the tension in the strap.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchor-
ages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/ shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the
hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages.
The tether strap should be routed under the center of the
head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the
rear of the seat back. Then tighten all three straps as you
push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
2
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seat back, should use the lap/ shoulder belt in a rear seat.
Tether Strap Mounting
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instruc-
tions that come with the child restraint system.
•
•
Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCH com-
patible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat belts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
•
•
Check belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your new vehicle.
If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
their back.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55
mph (80 or 90 km/ h) are desirable.
Transporting Pets
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration, within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide open throttle acceleration in low gear can be
detrimental and should be avoided.
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in
a collision.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown in Section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
2
WARNING!
SAFETY TIPS
Exhaust Gas
If you are required to drive with the deck lid/liftgate
open, make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow the safety tips below.
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (bent retractor, torn
webbing, etc. If there is any question regarding belt or
retractor condition, replace the belt.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear or uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect tread and sidewall for cuts or
cracks. Check wheel nuts for tightness, and tires (includ-
ing spare) for proper pressure.
Airbag Light
The light should come on and remain on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the LED is not lit during starting, have it
checked. If the light stays on or comes on while driving,
have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or fuel, power steering fluid or brake
fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be located and
corrected immediately.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 65
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
66 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 67
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
Adjust the mirror to center on the view through the rear
window. A two point pivot system allows for horizontal
and vertical mirror adjustment.
3
Annoying headlight glare can be reduced by moving the
small control under the mirror to the night position
(toward rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted
while set in the day position (toward windshield).
Adjusting Rear View Mirror
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
68 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Outside Mirror—Driver’s Side
WARNING!
Adjust the outside mirror to center on the adjacent lane of
traffic, with a slight overlap of the view obtained on the
inside mirror.
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide
with another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in this convex mirror.
Outside Mirror—Passenger’s Side
Adjust the convex outside mirror so you can just see the
side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror closest to the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 69
Electric Remote-Control Mirrors — If Equipped
Use the mirror select switch, located to the left of the
steering column on the instrument panel, to adjust the
view obtained in the outside mirrors. Press the L or R
button for Left or Right mirror selection. Use the center
off position to guard against accidentally moving a
mirror position.
3
Select a mirror and press one of the four arrows for the
direction you want the mirror to move.
Power Mirror Switches
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
70 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Illuminated Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
Sun Visor Sliding Feature
An illuminated vanity mirror is on the sun visor. To use
the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing the
mirror cover upward. The lights turn on automatically.
Closing the mirror cover turns off the lights.
The sun visors may be pulled out to provide extended
coverage of the side glass.
HANDS–FREE COMMUNICATION (UConnect™) —
IF EQUIPPED
UConnect™ is a voice-activated, hands-free, in-vehicle
communications system. UConnect™; allows you to dial
your cellular phone using simple voice commands (e.g.,
“Call Mike Work” or “Dial 248-555-1212”). Your cellular
phone’s audio is transmitted through your vehicle’s
stereo system; the system will automatically mute your
radio before receiving or sending a call.
NOTE: The UConnect™ system use requires a cellular
phone equipped with the Bluetooth ЉHands-Free Profile,Љ
version 0.96 or higher.
For UConnect Customer Support call 1-877-855-8400 or
visit the UConnect website (www.chrysler.com/
uconnect).
Illuminated Vanity Mirror
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 71
UConnect™ allows you to transfer calls between the
system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle, and enables you to mute the system’s micro-
phone for private conversations.
The rearview mirror contains the microphone for the
system and the control buttons that will enable you to
access the system. The diagram below shows the mirror
with the appropriate buttons. Individual button behavior
is discussed in the “Operation” Section.
The UConnect™; phone book enables you to store up to
32 names and four numbers per name. This system is
driven through your Bluetooth™ Hands-Free Profile
cellular phone. UConnect™ features Bluetooth™ technol-
ogy - the global standard that enables different electronic
devices to connect to each other without wires or a
docking station, so UConnect™ works no matter where
you stow your cellular phone (be it your purse, pocket, or
briefcase). UConnect™ allows up to seven cellular
phones to be linked to the system, and it is available in
English, French, or Spanish formats (as equipped).
3
UConnect™ Switches
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The UConnect™ system can be used with any Hands
Free Profile certified Bluetooth™ cellular phone. If your
cellular phone has a different profile (i.e. headset profile),
you will not be able to use any UConnect™ features.
prompted for a specific command and then guided
through the available options. There are two ways to give
commands to the UConnect™ system:
•
You can say ЉDialЉ at the ЉReadyЉ prompt. When
prompted for the phone number you wish to dial, say
the phone number (Љ123 456 7890Љ).
The UConnect™ system is fully integrated into your
vehicle, including your vehicle’s stereo system. All voice
prompts as well as the other party’s voice in a conversa-
tion will be played over your vehicle’s stereo system. The
volume of the UConnect™ system can be controlled
through your normal stereo controls.
•
Alternatively as you become familiar with the UCon-
nect™ system, you can combine the commands and
say ЉDial 123 456 7890Љ.
Pairing a Cellular Phone to the UConnect™ System
To begin using your UConnect™ system, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth™ enabled cellular phone. To
complete the registration process, you will need to refer-
ence your cellular phone owner’s manual.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the UConnect™ system such as caller ID.
Operation
Voice commands can be used in the operation of the
UConnect™ system and to navigate through the UCon-
nect™ menu structure. Voice commands should be given
after each UConnect™ system prompt. You will be
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt, say ЉSetup Phone PairingЉ.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 73
•
You will be asked to say a four-digit pin number into
the UConnect™ system which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone during the cellular
phone pairing process. You can enter any four-digit
pin number. You will not need to remember this pin
number after the initial registration process.
UConnect™ system to know which cellular phone to
use if multiple cellular phones are in the vehicle at the
same time. For example, if a priority 3 and priority 5
cellular phone are both in the vehicle, the UConnect™
system will use the priority 3 cellular phone when you
make a call. You can select to use a lower priority
cellular phone at any time.
3
•
•
•
The UConnect™ system will then prompt you to begin
the cellular phone pairing process on your cellular
phone. Please see your cellular phone user’s manual
for instructions on how to complete this step.
Making a Phone Call Using Digit Dialing
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt, says ЉDialЉ followed by the
phone number you wish to dial. For example, you can
say ЉDial 123 456 7890Љ. The phone number that you
enter must be a valid length.
For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the UConnect™ system a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
Making a Phone Call Using Your UConnect™
Phonebook
You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between 1 and 7, 1 having the highest
priority. You can connect up to seven cellular phones
to your UConnect™ system and the priority allows the
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
74 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt, says ЉCallЉ followed by the
name and designation of a phonebook entry that you
wish to dial. For example, you can say ЉCall John Doe
WorkЉ.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phone-
book, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
Add Names to Your UConnect™ Phonebook
The UConnect™ system will allow you to enter up to 32
names into the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations.
•
•
Press the “Phone” button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt, say ЉPhonebook New En-
tryЉ.
Edit Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
•
When prompted, say the name of the new entry.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt, say ЉPhonebook EditЉ.
Next, enter the number designation (e.g. “Home”,
“Work”, “Mobile”, or “Pager”). This will allow you to
have multiple numbers for each phonebook entry.
You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
•
Recite the phone number for the phonebook entry that
you are adding.
•
•
Next, choose the number designation that you wish to
edit. The choices are home, work, mobile, or pager.
Recite the new phone number for the phonebook entry
that you are editing.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 75
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunities to edit another entry
in the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or
return to the main menu.
phonebook from which you can choose. To select one
of the entries from the list, press the ЉVoice Recogni-
tionЉ button while the UConnect™ system is playing
the desired entry and say ЉDeleteЉ.
Phonebook edit can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
mobile and a home number, but you can add John Doe’s
work number later through phonebook edit.
•
After you enter the name, the UConnect™ system will
ask you if you wish to delete the home, work, mobile,
or pager number for this entry.
3
Delete All Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
•
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
Delete Entries in the UConnect™ Phonebook
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt, say ЉPhonebook Delete AllЉ.
•
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
The UConnect™ system will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt, say ЉPhonebook DeleteЉ.
After you enter the phonebook delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the phonebook entry
that you wish to delete. You can either say the name of
a phonebook entry that you wish to delete or you can
say ЉList NamesЉ to hear a list of the entries in the
•
After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
76 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
List All Names in the UConnect™ Phonebook
Phone Call Features
The following feature(s) can be accessed through the
UConnect™ system if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the UConnect™ system.
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt, say ЉPhonebook List
NamesЉ.
•
•
The UConnect™ system will play the names of all the
phonebook entries.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
To call one of the names in the list, press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button during the playing of the desired
name and say ЉCallЉ.
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
UConnect™ system will interrupt the stereo audio and
will ask if you would like to answer the call by pressing
the ’Phone’ button. Press the ’Phone’ button to answer
the call. To reject the call, press the ’Phone’ button until
you hear a single beep indicating that the incoming call
was rejected.
•
•
The UConnect™ system will then prompt you as to
number designation you wish to call.
The selected number will be dialed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 77
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
Putting a Call on Hold and Retrieving a Call from
Hold
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, press the ’Phone’ button to place the
current call on hold and answer the incoming call. To
reject the incoming call, you can disregard the call and
continue with your current conversation.
To put a call on hold, press the ’Phone’ button until you
hear a single beep which will indicate that the call has
been placed on hold. To bring the call back from hold,
press the ’Phone’ button.
3
Toggling Between Two Calls
Making a Second Call while Current Call in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently in a call,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ЉDialЉ or
ЉCallЉ followed by the phone number or phonebook entry
you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while the
second call is in progress.
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a single beep
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at one
time.
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press the ’Phone’ button until you hear a double
beep indicating that the two calls have been joined into
one conference call.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Three-Way Calling
Advanced Phone Connectivity
To initiate three-way calling, press the ’Voice Recogni-
tion’ button while a call is in progress and make a second
phone call. When the second call is established, press the
’Phone’ button until you hear a double beep indicating
that the two calls have been joined into one conference
call.
Transferring an Active Call between the
UConnect™ System and Your Cellular Phone
The UConnect™ system allows ongoing calls to be trans-
ferred to your cellular phone or to the UConnect™
system without terminating the call. To transfer an ongo-
ing call from your cellular phone to the UConnect™
system or vice versa, press the ’Voice Recognition’ button
and say ЉTransfer CallЉ.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, press the ’Phone’ button. All
calls in progress will be terminated.
Delete Paired Cellular Phones
Phone Redial
•
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
•
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt, say ЉSetup Phone PairingЉ.
At the next prompt, say ЉDeleteЉ.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt, say ЉRedialЉ.
The UConnect™ system will call the last number that
was dialed on your cellular phone. This may not be the
last number dialed by your UConnect™ system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 79
•
You will be asked to say the name of the phone that
you wish to delete. You can either say the name of the
phone that you wish to delete or you can say ЉAllЉ to
delete all the phones.
•
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt, say ЉSetup List PhonesЉ and
the UConnect™ system will play the phone names of
all paired cellular phones in order from highest prior-
ity to lowest priority.
Connect or Disconnect the Connection between the
UConnect™ System and Your Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ЉconnectedЉ
with one electronic device at a time.
Select a Lower Priority Paired Cellular Phone
3
•
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt, say ЉSetup Select PhoneЉ.
When prompted, say the phone name of the cellular
phone you wish to use, or say ЉList PhonesЉ to hear a
list of all the phones that have been paired to your
UConnect™ system. To select a phone from the list,
press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and say ЉSelectЉ.
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Blue-
tooth™ connection between a paired cellular phone and
the UConnect™ system, follow the instruction described
in your cellular phone user’s manual.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
•
The lower priority phone will only be used for the next
phone call. After that, the UConnect™ system will
return to using the highest priority phone in the
vehicle.
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
80 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UConnect™ System Features
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The ’Voice Recognition’ button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is playing ЉWould you like to pair a phone, clear
aѧЉ, you could press the ’Voice Recognition’ button and
say ЉPair A PhoneЉ to select that option without having to
listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Barge In - Touch Tone Phone Inputs
You can use your UConnect™ system to access a voice
mail system, an automated service, or any other phone
number that you can dial with any phone. When calling
a number with your UConnect™ system that normally
requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence on your
cellular phone keypad, you can push the ’Voice Recogni-
tion’ button and say the sequence you wish to enter
followed by ЉSendЉ. For example, if required to enter your
pin number, you can press the ’Voice Recognition’ button
and say Љ3 7 4 6 SendЉ, or whatever you have made your
pin. This method can also be used in instances where you
are pressing a number on your keypad to navigate
through a menu structure or to enter a number for a
pager.
Language Selection
To change the language that the UConnect™ system is
using, press the ’Phone’ button and say the name of the
language you wish to switch to (English, Español, or
Français as equipped). After selecting one of the lan-
guages, all prompts and voice commands will be in the
selected language.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 81
Turning Confirmation Prompts On/Off
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g. the UConnect™ sys-
tem will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the UConnect™ system. By dialing a
number with your paired Bluetooth™ cellular phone, the
audio will be played through your vehicle’s stereo sys-
tem. The UConnect™ system will work the same as if
you dialed the number using voice recognition.
•
•
Press the ’Phone’ button to begin.
3
After the ЉReadyЉ prompt, say ЉSetup ConfirmationЉ.
The UConnect™ system will play the current confir-
mation prompt status and you will be given the choice
to change it.
Mute/Unmute
When you mute the UConnect™ system, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the UConnect™ system press the ’Voice
Recognition’ button and say ЉMuteЉ. In order to unmute
the UConnect™ system; press the ’Voice Recognition’
button and say ЉUnmuteЉ.
Low Signal, Battery Strength, and Roam
Notification
The UConnect™ system will provide notification to
inform you if your cellular phone is in roaming status,
has low signal strength, or has a low battery when you
are trying to place a phone call.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
82 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Help
SEATS
If you need assistance at any prompt or if you want to
know what your options are at any prompt, say ЉHelpЉ.
The UConnect™ system will play all the options at any
prompt if you ask for help.
Front Seat Adjustment
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats, near the
floor. Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired
position.
Cancel
At any prompt, you can say ЉCancelЉ and you will be
returned to the previous menu.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency, say ЉDial EmergencyЉ or ЉCall
EmergencyЉ and the UConnect™ system will instruct
your cellular phone to call 911.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance, say ЉDial Towing Assis-
tanceЉ or ЉCall Towing AssistanceЉ. Please refer to the
24-Hour Towing Assistance coverage details in the
DaimlerChrysler Motors Company 24-Hour Towing As-
sistance Program Guide.
Manual Front Seat Adjuster
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 83
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
Driver’s Power Seat Height Adjuster — If
Equipped
The power seat height adjuster is on the outboard side of
the driver’s seat. Use this switch to move the seat up or
down.
WARNING!
3
•
•
Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt
might not be properly adjusted and you could be
injured. Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is
parked.
Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Driver’s Power Seat Height Adjuster
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
84 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining Bucket Seats
Folding Front Passenger Seat — If Equipped
The passenger front seat may be folded fully forward to
provide additional cargo space.
The recliner control is on the outboard side of the seat. To
recline, lean forward slightly before lifting the lever, then
lean back to the desired position and release the lever.
Lean forward and lift the lever to return the seatback to
its normal position.
To fold the seat forward pull up on the recliner lever
located on the outboard side of the seat.
Folding Seat Control Lever
Recliner Control Lever
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 85
Adjustable Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down
on the head restraints so that the upper edge is as high as
practical. To raise the head restraint, pull up on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, depress the button
and push down on the head restraint.
3
Adjustable Head Restraints
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
86 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Heated Seats — If Equipped
This feature heats the front driver’s and passenger’s
seats. The control for the heater is located on the out-
board side of each seat. After turning on the ignition, you
may choose from HIGH, or LOW heat settings. An
indicator on the switch shows which setting has been
chosen.
Heated Seat Switch
Press the switch once to select a heat setting (high or low)
and press the switch a second time in the same direction
to turn the heated seat off.
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within 2 to 3 minutes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 87
Folding Rear Seat
WARNING!
To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can
be folded forward. Push and hold the buttons shown in
the picture to fold down either or both seatbacks.
•
It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision,
people riding in these areas are more likely to be
seriously injured or killed.
3
•
•
Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts
Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
NOTE:
If the rear center lap/ shoulder belt appears to be
•
locked into place, check to verify that the seatback is
fully latched.
Folding Rear Seat Button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
88 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
If the seatback is properly latched and the rear center
lap/ shoulder belt still does not operate properly check
and see if the Automatic Locking retractor (ALR)
system is activated.
Tumbling Rear Seat
To provide additional storage in the cargo area, each rear
seat can be tumbled forward.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
It is important that the front seats be pulled forward
to the midpoint of the seat track to avoid contact
between the rear seat and the front seatback. If the
front seat is not pulled forward the two seats will
make contact during the tumbling motion and cause
damage to the rear seat material. After the rear seat is
tumbled forward and secured the front seat can then
be repositioned to the preferred position.
The rear center lap/shoulder belt is equipped with a
lock-out feature to ensure that the seatback is in the
fully upright and locked position when occupied. If
the rear seatback is not fully upright and locked and
the rear center lap/shoulder belt can be pulled out of
the retractor, the vehicle should immediately be
taken to your dealer for service. Failure to follow this
warning could result in serious or fatal injury.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 89
•
Push and hold the button on the seatback and fold
down the rear seatback.
•
Pull the release handle located on the outboard side of
the seat. Lift up the seat and tumble the seat forward.
3
Folding Rear Seat Button
Tumbling Seat Release Handle
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
90 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Attach the elastic strap, located at the base of the seat
cushion, onto the hook bar on the center trim panel to
hold the seat in place.
To return the rear seat to it’s upright latched position,
rotate the seat cushion rearward to latch the seat. Then
lift the seatback to its upright latched position.
NOTE: The elastic strap should be reinstalled in the clip
on the base of the seat cushion before returning the seat
to its normal position.
Tumbling Seat Strap
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 91
Rear Seat Removal
The rear seats can be removed to provide more cargo
•
Pull the release lever located on the outboard side of
the seat. Lift up the seat and tumble the seat forward.
space.
•
Push and hold the button on the seatback and fold
down the rear seatback.
3
Tumbling Seat Release Handle
Folding Rear Seat Button
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
92 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
•
Lift up the release levers to disengage the seat from the
floor attachments.
NOTE: Small rollers on the bottom of the folded seat
and a handle at the top allow the seat to be easily moved
when removed from the vehicle.
To reinstall the rear seat, insert the seat into the floor
attachments. Lower the release levers of the seat to latch
the front floor attachments and rotate the seat rearward
to latch the seat. Lift the seat back to its upright latched
position.
WARNING!
In an accident, you or others in your vehicle could be
injured if seats are not properly latched to their floor
attachments. Always be sure the seats are fully
latched.
Release Lever Location
•
Using the handle on the seat, the seat assembly can
now be lifted and removed from the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 93
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released. First pull
the hood release lever located under the left side of the
instrument panel.
Then move the safety catch located under the front edge
of the hood, near the center and slightly to the right, and
raise the hood.
Use the hood prop rod clipped to the driver’s side of the
engine compartment to secure the hood in the open
position. Place the hood prop at the location stamped into
the inner hood surface.
3
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 20
cm (8 inches) and then drop it. This should secure both
latches. Never drive your vehicle unless the hood is fully
closed, with both latches engaged.
Hood Release Lever
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
94 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
LIGHTS
Overhead Console Map/Reading Lights — If
Equipped
These lights are mounted between the sun visors in the
overhead console. Each light is turned ON by pressing
the lens. Press the lens a second time to turn the light
OFF. The lights also come on when a door is opened or
the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the
second detent.
Map/Reading Lights
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle. They will not turn off
automatically.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 95
Interior Lights
Dome Light Position
The interior lights come on when a door is opened.
Rotate the dimmer control completely
upward to the second detent to turn
on the interior lights. The interior
lights will remain on when the dim-
mer control is in this position. With the
ignition key in the OFF position, the
interior lights will automatically turn
off in about 8 minutes if the dimmer
control is left in the Dome light posi-
tion.
With the ignition key in the OFF position, the interior
lights will automatically turn off in about 8 minutes if a
door is left open or the dimmer control is left in the Dome
light position. Turn the ignition switch ON to restore the
interior light operation.
3
Dimmer Control
With the parking lights or headlights
on, rotating the dimmer control for the
interior lights on the Multi-Function
Control Lever upward will increase
the brightness of the instrument panel
lights.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
96 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Interior light Defeat (OFF)
Rotate the dimmer control to the ex-
treme bottom “OFF” position. The in-
terior lights will remain off when the
doors are open.
Multi-Function Control Lever
The Multi-Function Control Lever controls the operation
of the headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight
beam selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior
lights, the passing lights, and fog lights. The lever is
located on the left side of the steering column.
Headlights, Parking Lights, Instrument Panel
Lights
Turn the end of the Multi-Function Control Lever to the
first detent for parking light operation. Turn to the
second detent for headlight operation.
Parade Mode (Daytime Brightness Feature)
Rotate the dimmer control to the first
detent (white semi-circle). This feature
brightens the odometer and radio dis-
play when the parking lights or head-
lights are on during daylight condi-
tions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 97
Daytime Running Lights (Canada Only)
The front turn signal lights will come on as Daytime
Running Lights whenever the ignition switch is on, the
headlights are off, and the parking brake is off. The
headlight switch must be used for normal night time
driving.
3
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
Fog Lights — If Equipped
Multi-Function Control Lever
The front fog light switch is on the Multi-Function
Control Lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn
on the parking lights or the low beam headlights
and pull out the end of the control lever.
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
rotate the center portion of the Multi-Function Control
Lever up or down.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
98 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the head-
lights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will
turn off the fog lights.
Highbeam/Lowbeam Select Switch
Pull the Multi-Function Control Lever towards you to
switch the headlights to HIGH beam. Pull the control
lever a second time to switch the headlights to LOW
beam.
Turn Signals
Move the Multi-Function Control Lever up or down and
the arrows on each side of the instrument cluster flash to
show proper operation of the front and rear turn signal
lights. You can signal a lane change by moving the lever
partially up or down without moving beyond the detent.
Passing Light
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the Multi-Function Control Lever toward
you. This will cause the headlights to turn on at high
beam and remain on until the lever is released.
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is
moved, it would suggest that the fuse or indicator bulb is
defective.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
on the control lever. The lever is located on the
right side of the steering column. Move the con-
trol lever up to select the desired wiper speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 99
If the lever is pulled while in the OFF position, the wipers
will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn OFF.
Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single
wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the
wipers will continue to operate.
3
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch
and allow the wipers to return to the park position
before turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is
left on and the wipers freeze to the windshield,
damage to the wiper motor may occur when the
vehicle is restarted.
Windshield Wiper/Washer Control
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the control lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in
the delay range, the wiper will operate in low speed for
two wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
100 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Windshield Wiper Operation
TILT STEERING COLUMN
Move the lever upward to the second detent for Low
speed wiper operation, or to the third detent for High
speed operation
To tilt the column, push down on the lever below the
multi-function control lever and move the steering wheel
up or down, as desired. Pull the lever back up to lock the
column firmly in place.
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause be-
tween cycles, desirable. Move the lever to the DEL
position, then select the delay interval by turning the end
of the lever. Rotate the knob upward (clockwise) to
decrease the delay time and downward (counterclock-
wise) to increase the delay time. The delay can be
regulated from a maximum of approximately 18 seconds
between cycles, to a cycle every second.
Tilt Steering Column Control
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 101
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering col-
umn, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the ve-
hicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
3
TRACTION CONTROL SWITCH — IF EQUIPPED
The TRAC indicator, located in the instrument cluster,
will flash when the Traction Control System is in use.
Traction Control Switch
The TRAC OFF switch is located on the instrument panel
below the radio.
To turn the system back ON, press the switch a second
time until the TRAC OFF indicator turns OFF.
To turn the system OFF, press the TRAC OFF switch until
the TRAC OFF indicator in the instrument cluster lights
up.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
102 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: The Traction Control System indicator “TRAC
OFF” will illuminate momentarily as a bulb check, each
time the ignition switch is turned ON. This will occur
even if you used the “TRAC OFF” switch to turn the
system OFF.
NOTE: The Traction Control System will make buzzing
or clicking sounds when the system is in operation.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, this device takes over the accelerator
operation at speeds greater than 25 mph (40 km/ h). The
speed control lever is located on the right side of the
steering wheel.
Speed Control Switches
To Activate:
Push the ON/ OFF button. The CRUISE indicator in the
instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system
OFF, push the ON/ OFF button a second time. The
CRUISE indicator will turn off. The system should be
turned OFF when not in use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 103
To Deactivate:
WARNING!
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the speed control
lever towards you “CANCEL”, or normal brake or clutch
pressure while slowing the vehicle will deactivate speed
control without erasing the set speed memory. Pressing
the ON/ OFF button or turning off the ignition switch
erases the set speed memory.
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the system OFF when you are not using it.
3
To Resume Speed:
To Set At A Desired Speed:
To resume a previously set speed, push the “ACC/ RES”
lever up and release. Resume can be used at any speed
above 20 mph (32 km/ h).
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
down on the lever and release. Release the accelerator
and the vehicle will operate at the selected speed.
To Vary The Speed Setting:
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.
When the speed control is ON, speed can be increased by
pushing up and holding “ACC/ RES”. Release the lever
when the desired speed is reached, and the new speed
will be set.
While in the AutoStick mode, speed control will only
operate in third and fourth gear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
104 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tapping “ACC/ RES” once will result in a 2 mph (3
km/ h) speed increase. Each time the lever is tapped,
speed increases so that tapping the lever three times will
increase speed by 6 mph (10 km/ h), etc.
WARNING!
Speed Control can be dangerous where the system
can’t maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could
go too fast for the conditions, and you could lose
control. An accident could be the result. Don’t use
Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads that are
winding, icy, snow-covered, or slippery.
To decrease speed while speed control is ON, push down
and hold “COAST/ SET”. Release the lever when the
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
Tapping the “COAST/ SET” button once will result in a 1
mph (2 km/ h) speed decrease. Each time the button is
tapped, speed decreases.
To Accelerate For Passing:
Depress the accelerator as you would normally. When the
Manual Transaxle:
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Depressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed
control. A slight increase in engine RPM before the speed
control disengages is normal.
Using Speed Control On Hills
NOTE: The speed control system maintains speed up
and down hills. A slight speed change on moderate hills
is normal.
Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may need to
be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed
loss.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 105
Vehicles equipped with four speed automatic transaxles
may experience a downshift to 3rd gear while climbing
uphill or descending downhill. This downshift to 3rd
gear is necessary to maintain vehicle set speed.
push of a button. The Universal Transceiver operates off
your vehicle’s battery and charging system; no batteries
are needed.
On steep hills a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without speed control.
3
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The HomeLink system will be disabled if the
Vehicle Theft Alarm (if equipped) is in the Prearmed,
Armed or Alarming state. The HomeLink system will
only operate when the Vehicle Theft Alarm (if equipped)
is in the Disarmed mode.
The HomeLink Universal Transceiver replaces up to
three remote controls (hand held transmitters) that oper-
ate devices such as garage door openers, motorized
gates, or home lighting. It triggers these devices at the
HomeLink Buttons
For additional information on HomeLink, call 1–800–
355–3515, or on the internet at www.homelink.com.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
106 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Programming The Universal Transceiver
For best results, install a new battery in the hand held
transmitter before programming. If your garage door
opener (located in the garage) is equipped with an
antenna, make sure that the antenna is hanging straight
down.
WARNING!
A moving garage door can cause injury to people and
pets in the path of the door. People or pets could be
seriously or fatally injured. Only use this transceiver
with a garage door opener that has a “stop and
reverse” feature as required by federal safety stan-
dards. This includes most garage door opener mod-
els manufactured after 1982. Do not use a garage
door opener without these safety features it could
cause injury or death. Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515
or, on the Internet at www.homelink.com for safety
information or assistance.
1. Turn off the engine.
WARNING!
Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a danger-
ous gas. Do not run the vehicle’s exhaust while
training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can cause seri-
ous injury or death.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 107
WARNING!
Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver. Do
not train the transceiver if people or pets are in the
path of the door or gate. A moving door or gate can
cause serious injury or death to people and pets or
damage to objects.
3
2. Erase the factory test codes by pressing the two
outside buttons. Release the buttons when the light in the
Universal Transceiver begins to flash (about 20 seconds).
HomeLink Programming
NOTE: Step 2 does not have to be followed to program
additional hand held transmitters.
4. Using both hands, press the hand held transmitter
button and the desired Universal Transceiver button. Do
not release the buttons until step 5 has been completed.
3. Choose one of the three Universal Transceiver buttons
to program. Place the hand held controller one to three
inches from the Universal Transceiver while keeping its
indicator light in view.
NOTE: Some entry gates and garage door openers may
require you to replace step 4 with the procedures listed
under Canadian Programming.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
108 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
5. The indicator light in the Universal Transceiver will
begin to flash, first slowly and then rapidly. The rapid
flashing indicates successful programming. If after 90
seconds the indicator light does not flash rapidly or goes
out, return to step 1 and repeat the procedure. To train the
other buttons, repeat steps 3 and 4. Be sure to keep your
hand held transmitters in case you need to retrain the
Universal Transceiver.
manufactured after 1996, your garage door opener or
other device may have a “Rolling Code” system.
On garage door openers with the “Rolling Code” feature,
the transmitter code changes after each use to prevent the
copying of your code.
To check if your device is protected by a “Rolling Code”
system:
NOTE: If you do not successfully program the Uni-
versal Transceiver to learn the signal of your hand held
transmitter, refer to the Rolling Code Paragraph, or call
toll free for customer assistance at 1–800–355–3515, or
on the internet at www.homelink.com.
•
•
Check the owner’s manual for the device for mention
of “Rolling Codes”.
Press and hold the programmed button on the Univer-
sal Transceiver. If the Universal Transceiver indicator
light flashes rapidly and then stays on after 2 seconds,
the device has the “Rolling Code” feature.
“Rolling Code” Programming
NOTE: If your hand held transmitter appears to pro-
gram the Universal Transceiver, but your garage door or
other device does not operate, and your device was
To train a garage door opener (or other rolling code
equipped devices) with the rolling code feature, follow
these instructions after completing the Programming
portion of this text:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 109
NOTE: The assistance of a second person may make the
following programming procedure quicker and easier.
training process. Some garage door openers may require
you to do this procedure a third time to complete the
training.
1. Locate the training button on the garage door motor
head unit. The exact location and color of the button may
vary by garage door opener manufacturer. If you have
difficulty in locating the training button, check your
garage door opener manual, or call 1-800-355-3515 or, on
the Internet, at www.homelink.com.
Your garage door opener should now recognize your
Universal Transceiver. The remaining two buttons may
now be programmed if this has not previously been
done. Refer to the Programming instructions. You may
use either your Universal Transceiver or your original
hand-held transmitter to open you garage door.
3
2. Press and hold the training button on the garage door
opener head unit. This will activate the “training” light.
Canadian Programming/Gate Programming
Canadian frequency laws, and the technology of some
entry gates, require you to press and release the hand
held transmitter button every two seconds during pro-
gramming.
NOTE: After completing step 2, you have 30 seconds to
start step 3.
3. Return to the Universal Transceiver in the vehicle and
firmly press and release the garage door button. Press
and release the button a second time to complete the
Continue to press and hold the Universal Transceiver
button while you press and release the hand held trans-
mitter button until the frequency signal has been learned.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
110 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The Universal Transceiver light will flash slowly and
then rapidly when the programming is successful.
2. When the indicator light begins to flash slowly (after
20 seconds) position the hand held transmitter one to
three inches away from the button to be trained.
NOTE: When programming such a garage door opener
or gate, unplug the device to prevent possible damage to
the garage door or gate motor.
3. Press and hold the hand held transmitter button.
4. The Universal Transceiver indicator light will begin to
flash, first slowly, then rapidly. When the indicator lights
begin to flash rapidly, release both buttons.
Operation
Press and hold the desired button on the Universal
Transceiver until the garage door or other device begins
to operate. The light in the display shows that the signal
is being transmitted. The hand held transmitter may also
be used at any time.
Security
If you sell your vehicle, be sure to erase the frequencies.
To erase all of the previously trained frequencies, hold
down both outside buttons until the indicator light
begins to flash.
Reprogramming A Single Button
1. Press and hold the Universal Transceiver button to be
reprogrammed. Do not release until step 4 has been
completed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 111
This device complies with part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED
This feature has a compass/ temperature display and two
map lamps. The overhead console is located on the
headliner between the sun visors.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
3
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
HomeLink is a trademark owned by Johnson Controls,
Inc.
Overhead Console
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
112 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Compass/Temperature Display
STEP Button Functions:
This display provides the outside temperature and one of
eight compass readings to indicate the direction the
vehicle is facing.
WARNING!
Even if the display still reads a few degrees above
32°F ( 0°C), the road surface may be icy, particularly
in woods or on bridges. Drive carefully under such
conditions to prevent an accident and possible per-
sonal injury or property damage.
Step Button
1. US
2. Metric
3. Off
4. Magnetic Zone Selection
5. Manual Compass Calibration
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 113
Automatic Compass Calibration
The automatic calibrating feature of the compass elimi-
nates the need to calibrate the compass due to normal
varying conditions.
Compass Variance Selection
3
Variance is the difference between magnetic North and
geographic North. For proper compass function, the
correct variance zone must be set. Refer to the variance
map for the correct variance zone. To check the variance
zone, the ignition switch must be on and the compass/
temperature displayed. Press and hold the STEP button
for about 5 to 10 seconds until ZONE and the number
appears in the display. The number displayed is the
variance zone used by the compass. To change the zone,
press the STEP button to scroll through numbers 1
through 15.
When the correct variance is selected release the step
button and the Compass/ Temperature display will re-
turn to normal after approximately 15 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
114 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Compass Calibration
•
The STEP button must be pressed for 10 to 15 seconds
to place the compass into CAL mode. Regardless of
whether the CAL indicator is already illuminated.
If the compass appears erratic, inaccurate, abnormal or
the vehicle is new, you may calibrate the compass. Prior
to calibrating the compass make sure the proper zone is
selected. Refer to “Magnetic Zone Selection”.Find an
open area away from large metal objects. With the vehicle
running, press and hold the STEP button for (about 10 to
15 seconds). The display will illuminate the CAL indica-
tor. Drive slowly (about 5 mph) in 3 complete 360 circles.
The CAL indicator will turn off and the compass will be
calibrated.
Outside Temperature
Because engine temperature can increase the displayed
temperature, temperature readings are not updated
when the vehicle is not moving.
If the display shows Ϫ49°F (Ϫ45°C) or 140°F (60°C), see
your authorized dealer for repair.
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof control is located between the sun
visors on the overhead console.
NOTE:
•
The compass needs to go through a manual calibration
to insure proper operation when taking vehicle deliv-
ery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 115
Press and hold the button in the center of the sunroof
switch to open the vent. The sunroof can be stopped at
any position between closed and full vent. To close the
sunroof from the vent position, press and hold the switch
forward. Releasing the switch will stop the movement of
the sunroof and the sunroof will remain in the partial
vent position until the switch is pushed forward again.
3
Express Open Feature
During the Express Open operation, any movement of
the switch will stop the sunroof and it will remain in a
partial open position. Again, momentarily pressing the
switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature.
Power Sunroof Switch
Press and hold the switch rearward to fully open the
sunroof. The sunroof can be stopped at any position
between closed and full open. Momentarily pressing the
switch rearward will activate the Express Open Feature,
causing the sunroof to open automatically.
To close the sunroof, hold the switch in the forward
position. Again, any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open
condition until the switch is pushed forward again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
116 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
The sunshade can be opened manually. It will also open
as the sunroof opens. The sunshade cannot be closed if
the sunroof is open.
WARNING!
In an accident, there is a greater risk of being thrown
from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could also
be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten your
seat belt properly and make sure all passengers are
properly secured too.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle, with the keys in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unat-
tended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious injury
or death.
Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.
Never allow fingers or other body parts, or any
object to project through the sunroof opening. Injury
may result.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 117
Wind Buffeting
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-
rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
The outlets include tethered caps, labeled with a key
symbol or battery symbol, indicating power source. All
outlets are protected by a single 20 Amp fuse.
The standard outlet in the front of the center floor console
is a conventional cigar lighter outlet.
3
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Power Outlet
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
118 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
It will accept a cigar lighter unit, which is part of the
optional Smokers Package. To preserve the heating ele-
ment of the cigar lighter unit, do not hold the lighter in
the heating position. As a child safety precaution, this
outlet is powered by the ignition switch, only when the
switch is in the ЉONЉ or ЉACCESSORYЉ positions.
There are two optional power outlets. One is in the
Accessory Switch Bank, in the center of the instrument
panel.
Power Outlet
This outlet is powered directly by the battery, regardless
of the ignition switch position. All accessories connected
to this outlet should be removed or turned off when the
vehicle is not in use, to protect the battery against
discharge.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 119
The second is in the right rear cargo area.
Electrical Outlet Use With Engine Off
CAUTION!
•
Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not
in use (i.e. cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
3
•
•
Accessories that draw higher power (i.e. coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these inter-
mittently and with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Rear Power Outlet
Since this outlet is remote from the driver, it is powered
by the ignition switch, only when it is in the ЉONЉ or
ЉACCESSORYЉ positions, to protect the battery against
discharge. Note: Neither of the power outlets will accept
a cigar lighter unit. They are intended only for accessory
usage.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
120 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONSOLE FEATURES
The console has two front cup holders, a coin holder, 12
volt power outlet and a front storage tray. There are
additional cup holders; one is molded in the center of the
console to hold large cups and the other is at the rear of
the console to serve passengers in the rear seat. The floor
console power outlet will also operate a conventional
cigar lighter unit (if equipped with an optional Smoker’s
Package).
Front Cupholders
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 121
STORAGE
CAUTION!
Front Seat Storage Bin — If Equipped
•
Many accessories that can be plugged into the 12
volt power outlet, draw power from the vehicle’s
battery, even when not in use; i.e. cellular phones,
etc. Eventually, if plugged in long enough, the
vehicle’s battery will discharge sufficiently to
degrade battery life and/or prevent engine start-
ing.
3
•
•
Accessories that draw higher power such as cool-
ers, vacuum cleaners, lights, etc., will discharge
the battery even more quickly. Only use these
intermittently and with greater caution.
After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started,
(with accessories still plugged in), the vehicle
must be driven a sufficient length of time to allow
the generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
Front Seat Storage Bin
The storage bin is located under the front passenger’s
seat. To open lift up on the handle and pull the storage
bin forward.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Storage Pockets
There are also Storage pockets located on each door trim
WARNING!
panel.
•
•
•
To avoid tipping, lock the shelf securely in all
positions.
REAR SHELF PANEL
Do not drive this vehicle with the liftgate open, or
use the shelf as a seat.
The rear shelf panel attaches to guides in the rear cargo
area. The rear shelf panel may be installed in one of five
different positions.
Failure to follow these warnings could result in
serious or fatal injury.
NOTE: The liftgate may be opened or closed with the
rear cargo shelf panel in position 1, position 2, position 3
or position 4.
Position 1 (Top)
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the top guides and slide forward. Press down on the back
of the shelf panel to lock it into place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 123
Position 2 (Middle)
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the middle guides and slide forward. Press down on the
back of the shelf panel to lock it into place.
3
Rear Shelf Panel Position 1
WARNING!
Do not load objects on the shelf in position 1 (top).
In an accident objects could strike occupants causing
serious or fatal injury.
Rear Shelf Panel Position 2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
124 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Do not load objects over 100 lbs (45 kg) in position 2
(middle). Failure to follow this warning could cause
the shelf to collapse resulting in personal injury.
Position 3 (Floor)
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the bottom guides and slide forward.
NOTE: To carry items that may soil the carpeting, the
rear shelf panel may be inverted in position 2 or position
3.
Rear Shelf Panel Position 4
Position 4 (Vertical)
Insert the front outboard corners of the shelf panel into
the vertical guides behind the rear seatbacks near the
floor and slide downward. Push the shelf panel forward
to lock it into place.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 125
2. Twist the knob on the underside of the panel and
lower the shelf leg.
WARNING!
When in the vertical position, the rear shelf panel
should not be used as a barrier for large objects in
the cargo area when the seatbacks folded down. In
an accident objects could strike the seatbacks or
occupants causing serious or fatal injury.
3
Position 5 (table)
With the liftgate open the rear shelf panel can be moved
rearward to act as a serving counter.
1. Install the front corners of the shelf panel into the top
rear guides. Press down on the shelf panel to lock it into
place.
Rear Shelf Leg Release Knob
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
3. Install the shelf leg into the liftgate latch area as
labeled on the rear scuff plate.
WARNING!
Do not load objects over 100 lbs (45 kg) in position 5
(table). Failure to follow this warning could cause
the shelf to collapse resulting in personal injury.
ROOF LUGGAGE RACK — IF EQUIPPED
The crossbars and siderails are designed to carry the
weight on vehicles equipped with a luggage rack. The
load must not exceed 150 lbs (68 kg), and should be
uniformly distributed over the luggage rack crossbars.
Use both adjustable crossbars assemblies to support the
load and distribute the load as evenly as possible.
Rear Shelf Panel Position 5
To adjust the crossbars with latch style releases, release
the latches on the inboard side of the crossbar supports
on each side of the vehicle, then move the crossbars to the
desired position. Once the crossbar is in the desired
position, return both latches to the locked position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127
To adjust the crossbars with botton style releases, depress
the button and slide the crossbar to the next locking
position. Alternate sides until the crossbars are posi-
tioned correctly for your cargo and the stanchions are
locked square to the slide rails.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the roof rack and vehicle, do not
exceed the maximum roof rack load capacity of 150
lbs (68 kg). Always distribute heavy loads as evenly
as possible and secure the load appropriately.
3
External racks do not increase the total load carrying
capacity of the vehicle. Be sure that the total occupant
and luggage load inside the vehicle, plus the load on the
luggage rack, do not exceed the rated vehicle capacity.
Long loads which extend over the windshield, such
as wood panels or surfboards, should be secured to
both the front and rear of the vehicle.
Travel at reduced speeds and turn corners carefully
when carrying large or heavy loads on the roof rack.
Wind forces, due to natural causes or nearby truck
traffic, can add sudden upward loads. This is espe-
cially true on large flat loads and may result in
damage to the cargo or your vehicle.
NOTE: When the luggage rack is not in use, place the
crossbars together at the rear of the vehicle. In this
position they are designed to improve the vehicle aero-
dynamics and reduce wind noise.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Cargo must be securely tied before driving your
vehicle. Improperly secured loads can fly off the
vehicle, particularly at high speeds, resulting in
personal injury or property damage. Follow the roof
rack “Cautions” when carrying cargo on your roof
rack.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
130 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 131
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
132 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 137
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
4. Oil Pressure Light
Shows low engine oil pressure. The light will come
on and remain on when the ignition switch is
turned from the OFF to the ON position, and the light
will turn off after the engine is started. If the bulb does
not come on during starting, have the system checked by
an authorized dealer.
1. Fuel Gauge
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the
fuel tank.
2. Charging System Light
4
This light shows the status of the electrical charg-
ing system. The light should come on briefly when
the ignition is first turned ON and remain on briefly as a
bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, it means that there is a problem with the
charging system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY.
If the light comes on and remains on while driving, stop
the vehicle and shut off the engine. DO NOT OPERATE
THE VEHICLE UNTIL THE CAUSE IS CORRECTED.
The light does not show the quantity of oil in the engine.
This can be determined using the procedure shown in
Section 7. (See page 269 for more information.)
3. Deck Lid/Liftgate Ajar
This light comes on if the liftgate is not com-
5. Theft Alarm Light — If Equipped
pletely closed.
This light will flash rapidly for several seconds when the
alarm system is arming. The light will begin to flash
slowly indicating that the system is armed. (See page 26
for more information.)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
138 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. Engine Temperature Warning Light
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
This light warns of an overheated engine condi-
tion. If the engine is critically hot, a warning chime
will sound 10 times. After the chime turns off, the
engine will still be critically hot until the light goes out.
7. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrows will flash in unison with the exterior
turn signal, when using the turn signal lever.
There are steps that you can take to slow down an
impending overheat condition. If your air conditioning is
on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/ C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to Floor and
the Fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
NOTE: Turn signal bulbs are located in the Instrument
Panel. (See page 98 for more information.)
8. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-
perature. Any reading below the red area of the
gauge shows that the engine cooling system is
operating properly. The gauge pointer may show a
higher than normal temperature when driving in hot
weather, up mountain grades, in heavy stop and go
traffic, or when towing a trailer.
9. Speedometer
Indicates vehicle speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 139
10. High Beam Indicator
This light shows that the headlights are on high
beam. Pull the turn signal lever toward the steer-
ing wheel to switch the headlights from high or low
beam.
is not functioning and that service is required, however,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally provided that the BRAKE warning light is not
on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefit of Anti-Lock
Brakes.
11. Tachometer
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (rpm x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.
4
The warning light should be checked frequently to assure
that it is operating properly. Turn the ignition key to the
on position, but do not start the vehicle. The light should
come on. If the light does not come on, have the system
checked by an authorized dealer.
12. Anti-Lock Warning Light (ABS) — If Equipped
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS) described elsewhere in this manual. This
light will come on when the ignition key is
turned to the ON position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
13. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will come on for about six seconds. A chime
will sound if you have not pulled the shoulder belt
out of the retractor. This is a reminder to “buckle up”. If
you do not buckle up, the light will remain on.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on during driving,
it indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
140 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
14. Brake System Warning Light
The operation of the Brake Warning light can be checked
by turning the ignition key from the OFF to the ON
position. The light should illuminate for three seconds, or
until the engine is started, whichever comes first. The
light should then go out unless the parking brake is
applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light does not
illuminate, have the light inspected and serviced as soon
as possible.
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light comes on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, or
there is a low brake fluid level. On vehicles equipped
with Anti-lock brakes (ABS), it may also indicate an ABS
malfunction that could lead to reduced braking perfor-
mance.
The light will also come on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
WARNING!
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is danger-
ous. A significant decrease in braking performance
or vehicle stability during braking may occur. It will
take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your
vehicle harder to control. You could have an acci-
dent. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
If the parking brake is off and the light remains on, have
the brake system inspected as soon as possible.
15. Trac Indicator — If Equipped
The TRAC Light will come on momentarily as a bulb
check when the ignition switch is first turned ON.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 141
The light will flash when the Traction Control System is
controlling traction.
18. Trip Indicator
This vacuum fluorescent display indicator will illuminate
when the Trip Odometer is in use.
16. Door Ajar Indicator
This vacuum fluorescent display indicator illuminates
the word “DOOR”, when a door is not completely closed.
If the door is open for more than 8 minutes, the light will
turn off.
By pushing the trip button, located next to the instrument
cluster, the odometer will toggle between total distance
and trip distance. In the trip odometer mode, holding the
trip button for more than 2 seconds will reset the trip
odometer to “0”.
4
17. Odometer/Trip Odometer
The odometer shows the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. The trip odometer shows the trip distance
since the last reset.
19. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the Speed Control
System is ON. (See page 102 for more informa-
tion.)
U.S. Federal regulations require that upon transfer of
vehicle ownership, the seller certify to the purchaser the
correct mileage that the vehicle has been driven. There-
fore, if the odometer reading changes during repair or
replacement, be sure to keep a record of the reading
before and after the service so the correct mileage can be
determined.
NOTE: The word “SET” will not illuminate when the
Speed Control System is on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
142 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
20. Airbag Light
•
The system has been automatically deactivated to
prevent damage to the brake system due to over-
heated brake temperatures.
The light comes on and remains on for 6 to 8
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch
is first turned ON. If the light does not come on
during starting, stays on, or comes on while driving, have
the system checked by an authorized dealer. (See page 52
for more information.)
NOTE: Extended heavy use of Traction Control may
cause the system to deactivate and turn on the TRAC
OFF Light. This is to prevent overheating of the brake
system and is a normal condition. The system will remain
disabled for about 4 minutes until the brakes have
cooled. The system will automatically reactivate and turn
off the TRAC OFF Light.
21. Trac Off Light — If Equipped
The TRAC OFF light will illuminate momentarily as a
bulb check when the ignition switch is first turned ON. If
the light does not come on, have the system checked.
22. Malfunction Indicator Light
The light will also come on if:
This light is part of an onboard diagnostic system
called OBD that monitors emissions, engine, and
automatic transmission control systems. The light
will illuminate when the key is in the ON/ RUN position
before engine start. If the bulb does not come on when
turning the key from OFF to ON/ RUN, have the condi-
tion checked promptly.
•
The Traction Control switch has been used to turn
the system off,
•
•
There is an anti-lock system failure,
There is a Traction Control system failure,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 143
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc. may illuminate the light after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
24. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level drops to about 1/ 8 tank, the
fuel symbol will light and a single chime will
sound. The light will remain on until fuel is added.
If the fuel level drops to approximately 1.0 gallon (3.75
Liter), the fuel symbol will flash several times and the
chime will sound several times.
If the Malfunction Indicator Light flashes when the
engine is running, serious conditions may exist that
could lead to immediate loss of power or severe catalytic
converter damage. The vehicle should be serviced as
soon as possible if this occurs. (See page 266 for more
information.)
4
25. AutoStick Gear Position— If Equipped
This vacuum fluorescent display indicator illuminates
when the gearshift lever is moved to the AutoStick
position and shows the current gear selection.
26. Fuel Door Reminder
23. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light shows when the front fog lights are ON.
(See page 97 for more information.)
This symbol is a reminder that the Fuel Filler Door is
located on the front passenger’s (right) side of the vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
144 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
27. Odometer/Trip Odometer Reset Knob
Clock Setting Procedure
Press the knob to switch between the odometer and trip
odometer. While the trip odometer is being displayed,
press and hold this knob for a few seconds to reset the
trip odometer to zero miles/ kilometers.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON or ACC position
and press the time button. Using the tip of a ballpoint pen
or similar object, press either the hour (H) or minute (M)
buttons on the radio.
ELECTRONIC DIGITAL CLOCK
2. Press the H button to set hours or the M button to set
minutes. The time setting will increase each time you
press a button.
The clock and radio each use the display panel built into
the radio. A digital readout shows the time in hours and
minutes whenever the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position and the time button is pressed.
RADIO GENERAL INFORMATION
Radio Broadcast Signals
When the ignition switch is in the OFF position, or when
the radio frequency is being displayed, time keeping is
accurately maintained.
Your new radio will provide excellent reception under
most operating conditions. Like any system, however, car
radios have performance limitations, due to mobile op-
eration and natural phenomena, which might lead you to
believe your sound system is malfunctioning. To help
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 145
you understand and save you concern about these “ap-
parent” malfunctions, you must understand a point or
two about the transmission and reception of radio sig-
nals.
AM Reception
AM sound is based on wave amplitude, so AM reception
can be disrupted by such things as lightning, power lines
and neon signs.
Two Types of Signals
FM Reception
There are two basic types of radio signals... AM or
Amplitude Modulation, in which the transmitted sound
causes the amplitude, or height, of the radio waves to
vary... and FM or Frequency Modulation, in which the
frequency of the wave is varied to carry the sound.
Because FM transmission is based on frequency varia-
tions, interference that consists of amplitude variations
can be filtered out, leaving the reception relatively clear,
which is the major feature of FM radio.
4
NOTE: On vehicles so equipped the radio, steering
wheel radio controls and 6 disc CD/ DVD changer will
remain active for up to 45 seconds after the ignition
switch has been turned off. Opening a vehicle front door
will cancel this feature.
Electrical Disturbances
Radio waves may pick up electrical disturbances during
transmission. They mainly affect the wave amplitude,
and thus remain a part of the AM reception. They
interfere very little with the frequency variations that
carry the FM signal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
146 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SALES CODE RBB—AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER AND CD
CHANGER CAPABILITY
Radio Operation
Power/Volume Control
Press the ON/ VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control clockwise to increase the volume.
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
volume control to the right increases the volume and to
the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
RBB Radio
For your convenience, the volume can be turned down,
but not up, when the audio system is off and the ignition
is ON.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 147
Seek
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within 5 seconds after pressing the SET button,
the station will continue to play but will not be locked
into push-button memory.
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The
radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
make another selection. Holding the button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the push-button twice.
4
Tune
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If the button is pushed and held,
the radio will continue to tune until the button is
released. The frequency will be displayed and continu-
ously updated while the button is pushed.
Every time a preset button is used a corresponding
button number will be displayed.
To Set The Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the “1–5” button you wish to lock onto this station
Audio
The audio button controls the BASS, TREBLE, BAL-
ANCE, and FADE.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
148 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Press the AUDIO button and BASS will be displayed.
Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or decrease the
Bass tones.
AM/FM Selection
Press the AM/ FM button to change from AM to FM. The
operating mode will be displayed next to the station
frequency. The display will show ST when a stereo
station is received in the FM mode.
Press the AUDIO button a second time and TREB will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or
decrease the Treble tones.
Mode Button
Press the MODE button to select between the cassette
tape player, CD changer, or the Satellite Radio (if
equipped). When the Satellite Radio (if equipped) is
selected “SAT” will appear in your radio display.
Press the AUDIO button a third time and BAL will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Press the AUDIO button a fourth time and FADE will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the
sound level between the front and rear speakers.
A CD or tape may remain in the player while in the
Satellite or radio mode.
SCAN Button (Radio Mode)
Press the AUDIO button again or wait 5 seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station, in either AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for 5 seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press SCAN a second time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 149
Cassette Player Features
With ignition OFF and the sound system OFF, you can
eject the tape cassette by pushing the EJECT button.
The SEEK symbol appears on the display when Music
Search is in operation. Music Search shuts off automati-
cally when a selection has been located.
You can turn the tape player ON by inserting a cassette or
activating the MODE button (with a cassette in the radio),
but only when the ignition and radio are on.
Selective Music Search
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 7 selections.
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
move 2 selections, etc.
4
Each time a cassette is inserted the tape player will begin
playing on the side of the cassette that is facing up in the
player.
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons
Pressing the TUNE button up or down momentarily
activates Fast Forward or Rewind and makes the direc-
tional arrows appear on the display.
Music Search
Pressing the SEEK button while playing a tape will start
the Music Search mode. Press the SEEK button up for the
next selection on the tape and down to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the tape is within
the first 5 seconds of the current selection.
To stop Fast Forward or Rewind, press the TUNE button
again.
Time Button
Press the time button to toggle between station frequency
and time of day.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
150 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SCAN Button (Cassette Mode)
Pressing this button while playing a cassette tape will
change the side of the tape being played.
CD Changer Control Capability — If Equipped
This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD
changer available through Mopar Accessories. The fol-
lowing instructions are for the radio controls that operate
this CD changer.
NR (Noise Reduction)
Pushing the Number 2 Pre-set button when a tape is
playing deactivates the Dolby Noise Reduction System*.
When Dolby is ON, the NR symbol appears on the
display. Each time a tape is inserted the Dolby will turn
ON.
Mode Button
To activate the CD changer, press the MODE button until
CD information appears on the display.
Push-Button
* “Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo-
ratories Licensing Corporation.
While the CD changer is playing, press the NUMBER 1
push-button or the NUMBER 5 push-button to select a
disc numbered higher or lower than the one currently
being played.
Seek Button
Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the
same disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 151
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and
Equipped)
hold the RW button for fast reverse.
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
The audio output can be heard when fast forward and
fast reverse are activated.
CD Diagnostic Indicators
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or
the player, and play will resume automatically.
Random Play (RND)
4
Press the Random button to play the tracks on the
selected disc in random order for an interesting change of
pace.
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the
following warning symbols may appear on your display.
Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second
time or by ejecting the CD from the changer.
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.
SCAN Button (CD Mode)
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed
when the operating temperature is corrected or another
MODE is selected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
152 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:
SALES CODE RAZ—AM/ FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CASSETTE TAPE PLAYER, CD PLAYER
AND CD CHANGER CONTROLS
•
•
•
•
Excessive vibration
Disc inserted upside down
Damaged disc
Water condensation on optics
RAZ Radio
Operating Instructions — Radio
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is controlled by the
ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position to
operate the radio.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 153
Power Switch, Volume Control
Radio Data System (RDS)
Press the ON/ VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control clockwise to increase the volume. The
volume will be displayed and continuously updated
while the button is pressed.
The Radio Data System allows radio broadcasting sta-
tions to send data signals on a subcarrier frequency
which is added to the stereo signal. RDS was developed
to give FM receivers user-friendly features, such as
Program Service name (PS) and Program Type (PTY).
Program Service name is typically used by the broad-
caster to display the station’s name or call letters, for
example ЉWNICЉ. Typically these are 8 characters in
length and are displayed by the radio for those stations
which are broadcasting this information. PTY (Program
Type) is used to characterize the station’s program ma-
terial, for example ЉRock MusicЉ.
Seek Button (Radio Mode)
Press and release the Seek button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. Holding
the button will by pass stations until you release the
button.
4
Tuning
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,
the radio will continue to tune until you release the
button. The frequency will be displayed and continu-
ously updated while the button is pressed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
154 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
PTY (Program Type) Button
Program Type
Radio Display
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button
within 5 seconds will allow the program format type to
be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broad-
cast PTY information.
News
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
R & B
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Program Type
Adult Hits
Radio Display
Adlt Hit
Soft
Soft
Classical
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Inform
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Classic Rock
College
Country
Talk
Talk
Information
Jazz
Top 40
Top 40
Weather
Jazz
Weather
Foreign Language
Language
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 155
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
Balance
The Balance control adjusts the left-to-right speaker bal-
ance. Push in the button and it will pop out. Adjust the
balance and push the button back in. The balance will be
displayed and continuously updated while the button is
turned.
The radio display will flash “SEEK” and the selected PTY
program type when searching for the next PTY station. If
no station is found with the selected PTY program type,
the radio will return to the last preset station.
Fade
4
The Fade control provides for balance between the front
and rear speakers. Push in the button and it will pop out.
Adjust the balance and push the button back in. The fade
will be displayed and continuously updated while the
button is turned.
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
Pressing PTY, then SCAN will scan the FM Band and stop
at all RDS stations. Each RDS station will be played for a
5 second scan once around the FM Band and stop at the
last station. The PTY icon will then turn off.
Tone Control
Slide the Bass and/ or Treble controls up or down to
adjust the sound for the desired tone. The treble, and bass
will be displayed and continuously updated while the
slide is moved.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
156 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
AM/FM Selection
To Set The Radio Push-button Memory
Press the AM/ FM button to change from AM to FM. The
operating mode will be displayed next to the station
frequency. The display will show ST when a stereo
station is received.
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the
push-button you wish to lock onto this station and press
and release that button. If a station is not selected within
5 seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button
memory.
Scan Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next station, in either AM or FM, pausing for 5
seconds at each listenable station before continuing to the
next.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into memory. You can recall the
stations stored in SET 2 memory by pressing the push-
button twice.
Pressing the AM/ FM button continues the search in the
alternate frequency band.
To stop the search, press SCAN a second time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 157
To Change From Clock To Radio Mode
Press the Time button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
Press the SEEK button up or down to move the track
number to skip forward or backward 1 to 6 selections.
Press the SEEK button once to move 1 selection, twice to
move 2 selections, etc.
Operating Instructions — Tape Player
Insert the cassette with the exposed tape side toward the
right and the mechanical action of the player will gently
pull the cassette into the play position.
Fast Forward (FF)
Press the FF button up momentarily to advance the tape
in the direction that it is playing. The tape will advance
until the button is pressed again or the end of the tape is
reached. At the end of the tape, the tape will play in the
opposite direction.
4
NOTE: When subjected to extremely cold temperatures,
the tape mechanism may require a few minutes to warm
up for proper operation. Sometimes poor playback may
be experienced due to a defective cassette tape. Clean and
demagnetize the tape heads at least twice a year.
Rewind (RW)
Press the RW button momentarily to reverse the tape
direction. The tape will reverse until the button is pressed
again or until the end of the tape is reached. At the end of
the tape, the tape will play in the opposite direction.
Seek Button
Press the SEEK button up for the next selection on the
tape and down to return to the beginning of the current
selection.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
158 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Tape Eject
Pinch Roller Release
Press the EJT Tape button and the cassette will disengage
and eject from the radio.
If ignition power or the radio ON/ OFF switch are turned
off, the pinch roller will automatically retract to protect
the tape from any damage. When power is restored to the
tape player, the pinch roller will automatically reengage
and the tape will resume play.
Scan Button
Press this button to play 10 seconds of each selection.
Press the scan button a second time to cancel the feature.
Noise Reduction
The Dolby Noise Reduction System* is on whenever the
tape player is on, but may be switched off.
Changing Tape Direction
If you wish to change the direction of tape travel (side
being played), press the PTY button. The lighted arrow in
the display window will show the new direction.
To turn off the Dolby Noise reduction System: Press the
Dolby button (button 2) after you insert the tape. The NR
light in the display will go off when the Dolby System is
off. The Dolby System is automatically reactivated each
time a tape is inserted.
Metal Tape Selection
If a standard metal tape is inserted into the player, the
player will automatically select the correct equalization
and the 70 symbol will appear in the display window.
* ”Dolby” noise reduction manufactured under license
from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation. Dolby
and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Labo-
ratories Licensing Corporation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 159
Operating Instructions — CD Player
If the volume control is ON, the unit will switch from
radio to CD mode and begin to play. The display will
show the track number and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track one.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the volume control ON before the CD player
will operate.
NOTE:
•
You may eject a disc with the radio OFF. The ignition
switch must be in the ON or ACC position to insert a
disc with the radio OFF.
CAUTION!
4
3
This CD player will accept 4 ⁄4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
•
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player and the display will show the time of day. If
you insert a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will
show the time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out.
Inserting The Compact Disc
The CD player contained within the radio is not a
multi-disc changer, and will only accept one CD. Gently
insert one CD into the CD player with the CD label facing
up. The CD will automatically be pulled into the CD
Player.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
160 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Seek Button
FF/TUNE/RW
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first 10 seconds of the current selection.
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
Program Button 4 (Random Play)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the tracks on the se-
lected disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
EJT CD (Eject) Button
Press this button and the disc will unload and move to
the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to the
radio mode.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The radio mode will continue to appear.
Press TUNE FF to fast forward through the tracks. Press
the FF button a second time to stop the fast forward
feature. If TUNE RW is pressed, the current track will
reverse to the beginning of the track and begin playing.
The disc can be ejected with the radio OFF.
Press button 4 a second time to stop Random Play.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 161
MODE
Time Button
Press the MODE button to select between the tape player,
Press this button to change the display from elapsed CD
CD player, or satellite radio (if equipped).
playing time to time of day.
To select Satellite Radio (if equipped), press the MODE
button until the word SIRIUS appears. The following will
be displayed in this order: After three seconds, the
current channel name and number will be displayed for
five seconds. The current program type and channel
number will then be displayed for five seconds. The
current channel name and number will then be displayed
until an action occurs. A CD or tape may remain in the
player while in the Satellite Radio mode.
Scan Button
Press this button to play the first 10 seconds of each track.
To stop the scan function, press the button a second time.
4
CD Changer Control Capability — If Equipped
This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD
changer available through Mopar Accessories. The fol-
lowing instructions are for the radio controls that operate
this CD changer.
Mode Button
To activate the CD changer, press the MODE button until
CD information appears on the display.
Tape CD Button
Press this button to select between CD player and Tape
player.
Disc Up/Program Button 1
Press the DISC up (button 1) button to play the next
available disc.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
162 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Disc Down/Program Button 5
Press the DISC down (button 5) button to play the
previous disc.
CD Diagnostic Indicators
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or
the player, and play will resume automatically.
Seek Button
Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the
same disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the
following warning symbols may appear on your display.
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.
Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and
hold the RW button for fast reverse.
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed
when the operating temperature is corrected or another
MODE is selected.
The audio output can be heard when fast forward and
fast reverse are activated.
An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:
Random Play (RND)
Press the Random button to play the tracks on the
selected disc in random order for an interesting change of
pace.
•
•
•
•
Excessive vibration
Disc inserted upside down
Damaged disc
Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second
time or by ejecting the CD from the changer.
Water condensation on optics
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 163
SALES CODE RBK—AM/ FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER AND CD CHANGER
CONTROLS
Radio Operation
Power/Volume Control
Press the ON/ VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn the
volume control clockwise to increase the volume.
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is supplied through
the ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position
to operate the radio.
4
Seek
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up or the bottom to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding the button in will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
RBK Radio
Tune
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If you press and hold the button,
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
164 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
the radio will continue to tune until you release the
button. The frequency will be displayed and continu-
ously updated while the button is pressed.
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the push-button twice. Every time a preset
button is used a corresponding button number will be
displayed.
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET button.
SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the “1–5”
button you wish to lock onto this station and press and
release that button. If a button is not selected within 5
seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will
continue to play but will not be locked into push-button
memory.
Audio
The audio button controls the BASS, TREBLE, BAL-
ANCE, and FADE.
Press the AUDIO button and BASS will be displayed.
Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or decrease the
Bass tones.
Press the AUDIO button a second time and TREB will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or
decrease the Treble tones.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 10 AM and 10 FM
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The
Press the AUDIO button a third time and BAL will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 165
Press the AUDIO button a fourth time and FADE will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the
sound level between the front and rear speakers.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
Press the AUDIO button again or wait 5 seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
AM/FM Selection
4
Press the AM/ FM button to change from AM to FM. The
operating mode will be displayed next to the station
frequency. The display will show ST when a stereo
station is received.
CD Player Operation
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the volume control ON before the CD player
will operate.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
General Information
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
166 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Inserting The Compact Disc
Seek
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first second of the current selection.
CAUTION!
3
This CD player will accept 4 ⁄4 inch (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
EJT — Eject
Press the EJT button and the disc will unload and move
to the entrance for easy removal. The unit will switch to
the radio mode.
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the display will show the time of day.
If you do not remove the disc within 15 seconds, it will be
reloaded. The unit will continue in radio mode.
If the power is ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD
mode and begin to play when you insert the disc. The
display will show the track number and index time in
minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of track
one.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF
(except on convertibles).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 167
FF/TUNE/RW
Satellite Radio (if equipped). When Satellite Radio (if
equipped) is selected “SAT” will appear in your radio
display.
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
A CD or tape may remain in the player while in the
Satellite mode.
Random Play — RND/Program Button 4
Press the RND (button 4) button while the CD is playing
to activate Random Play. This feature plays the tracks on
the selected disc in random order to provide an interest-
ing change of pace.
Time
4
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed CD playing time to time of day.
CD Changer Control Capability — If Equipped
This radio is compatible with a remote mounted CD
changer available through Mopar Accessories. The fol-
lowing instructions are for the radio controls that operate
this CD changer.
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Press the RND (button 4) button a second time to stop
Random Play.
Mode
Mode Button
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between the
To activate the CD changer, press the MODE button until
CD player, the optional remote CD changer and the
CD information appears on the display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
168 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Disc Up/Program Button 1
Random Play (RND)
Press the DISC up (button 1) button to play the next
available disc.
Press the Random button to play the tracks on the
selected disc in random order for an interesting change of
pace.
Disc Down/Program Button 5
Press the DISC down (button 5) button to play the
previous disc.
Random can be cancelled by pressing the button a second
time or by ejecting the CD from the changer.
Seek Button
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Press the SEEK up or down to select another track on the
Equipped)
same disc. A SEEK symbol will appear on the display.
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
Fast Forward And Rewind Buttons
Press and hold the FF button for fast forward. Press and
CD Diagnostic Indicators
hold the RW button for fast reverse.
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or
the player, and play will resume automatically.
The audio output can be heard when fast forward and
fast reverse are activated.
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the
following warning symbols may appear on your display.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 169
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.
SALES CODE RBQ—AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH 6 - DISC CD CHANGER
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed
when the operating temperature is corrected or another
MODE is selected.
An ERR symbol will appear on the display if the laser is
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:
4
•
•
•
•
Excessive vibration
Disc inserted upside down
Damaged disc
Water condensation on optics
RBQ Radio
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
170 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Radio Operation
channel number will then be displayed for five seconds.
The current channel name and number will then be
displayed until an action occurs. CD’s may remain in the
player while in the Satellite Radio mode.
Power/Volume Control
Press the PWR/ VOL control to turn the radio on. Turn
the volume control clockwise to increase the volume.
Seek
NOTE: Power to operate the radio is controlled by the
ignition switch. It must be in the ON or ACC position to
operate the radio.
Press and release the SEEK button to search for the next
station in either the AM or FM mode. Press the top of the
button to seek up and the bottom to seek down. The
radio will remain tuned to the new station until you
make another selection. Holding the button in will by-
pass stations without stopping until you release it.
Mode
Press the MODE button repeatedly to select between AM,
FM, the CD changer and Sirius Satellite Radio™ (if
equipped). The display will show ST when a stereo
station is received.
Tune
Press the TUNE control up or down to increase or
decrease the frequency. If the button is pressed and held,
the radio will continue to tune until the button is
released. The frequency will be displayed and continu-
ously updated while the button is pressed.
To select Sirius Satellite Radio™ (if equipped), press the
MODE button until the word SIRIUS appears. The fol-
lowing will be displayed in this order: After three sec-
onds, the current channel name and number will be
displayed for five seconds. The current program type and
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 171
To Set The Radio Push-Button Memory
Audio
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to push-button memory, press the SET RND
button. SET 1 will show in the display window. Select the
“1–6” button you wish to lock onto this station and press
and release that button. If a button is not selected within
5 seconds after pressing the SET RND button, the station
will continue to play but will not be locked into push-
button memory.
The audio button controls the BASS, TREBLE, BAL-
ANCE, and FADE.
Press the AUDIO button and BASS will be displayed.
Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or decrease the
Bass tones.
4
Press the AUDIO button a second time and TREB will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to increase or
decrease the Treble tones.
You may add a second station to each push-button by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM and 12 FM
stations to be locked into push-button memory. The
stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the corresponding push-button twice. Every
time a preset button is used, a corresponding button
number will be displayed.
Press the AUDIO button a third time and BAL will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Press the AUDIO button a fourth time and FADE will be
displayed. Press the SEEK + or SEEK – to adjust the
sound level between the front and rear speakers.
Press the AUDIO button again or wait 5 seconds to exit
setting tone, balance, and fade.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
172 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Time Button
CD Player Operation
Press the TIME button to change the display between
radio frequency and time.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position and the Power / Volume control pushed ON
before the CD player will operate.
General Information
This radio complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
Inserting The Compact Disc
CAUTION!
1. This device may not cause harmful interference,
3
This CD player will accept 4 ⁄4 inch (12 cm) discs
2. This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired opera-
tion.
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressively ap-
proved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
You may either insert or eject a disc with the radio OFF.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
OFF, the display will show the time of day. If you insert
a disc with the ignition OFF, the display will show the
time of day for about 5 seconds, then go out.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 173
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the disc number, the track number, and index time
in minutes and seconds. Play will begin at the start of
track 1.
Radio display will show “ejecting” when it is being
ejected.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
15 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will continue to play the non-removed CD. If
the CD is removed and there are other CD’s in the radio,
the radio will play the next CD. If the CD is removed and
there are no other CD’s in the radio, the radio will return
to the last selected AM or FM mode.
LOAD/ EJT — Load
4
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the button with the
corresponding number where the CD is being loaded.
After the radio displays “load” insert the CD into the
player.
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
Seek
Radio display will show “loading” when it is being
loaded.
Press the top of the SEEK button for the next selection on
the CD. Press the bottom of the button to return to the
beginning of the current selection, or return to the
beginning of the previous selection if the CD is within the
first second of the current selection.
LOAD / EJT — Eject
Press the LOAD/ EJT button and the button with the
corresponding number where the CD was loaded and the
disc will unload and move to the entrance for easy
removal.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
174 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Scan
PTY (Program Type) Button
Press the Scan button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
Pressing this button once will turn on the PTY mode for
5 seconds. If no action is taken during the 5 second time
out the PTY icon will turn off. Pressing the PTY button
repeatedly within 5 seconds will allow the program
format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not
currently broadcast PTY information.
FF/TUNE/RW
Press FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will begin to
fast forward until FF is released. The RW ( Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
Toggle the PTY button to select the following format
types:
Random Play — SET / RND
Press the RND button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the tracks on the disc in
random order to provide an interesting change of pace.
Program Type
Adult Hits
Radio Display
Adlt Hit
Classical
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
ALERT!
Test
Press the SEEK button to move to the next randomly
selected track.
Classic Rock
College
Press the SET / RND button a second time to stop
Random Play.
Country
Emergency
Emergency Test
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 175
Program Type
Information
Radio Display
Inform
Program Type
Radio Display
Talk
Talk
Jazz
Jazz
Top 40
Top 40
Foreign Language
News
Language
News
Weather
Weather
By pressing the SEEK button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected PTY name. The PTY
function only operates when in the FM mode.
Nostalgia
Nostalga
Oldies
Persnlty
Public
4
Oldies
Personality
Public
The radio display will flash “SEEK” and the selected PTY
program type when searching for the next PTY station. If
no station is found with the selected PTY program type,
the radio will return to the last station.
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
R & B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
If a preset button is activated while in the PTY (Program
Type) mode, the PTY mode will be exited and the radio
will tune to the preset station.
Soft
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
176 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
By pressing the SCAN button when the PTY icon is
displayed, the radio will stop at every PTY station on the
band and list each corresponding program type in the
radio display.
As a safeguard and to protect your CD player, one of the
following warning symbols may appear on your display.
A CD HOT symbol indicates the player is too hot.
CD HOT will pause the operation. Play can be resumed
when the operating temperature is corrected or another
MODE is selected.
Time
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed CD playing time to time of day.
CD ERROR will appear on the display if the laser is
unable to read the Disc data for the following reasons:
Operating Instructions - Satellite Radio Mode (If
Equipped)
Refer to the Satellite Radio section of the Owner’s
Manual.
•
•
•
•
•
Warped disc
Excessive vibration
Disc inserted upside down
Damaged disc
CD Diagnostic Indicators
When driving over a very rough road, the CD player may
skip momentarily. Skipping will not damage the disc or
the player, and play will resume automatically.
Water condensation on optics
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 177
SALES CODE RB1—AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH DVD/GPS NAVIGATION SYSTEM
variety of destinations and routes. Refer to your “Navi-
gation User’s Manual” for detailed operating instruc-
tions.
NOTE: If your vehicle is not equipped with the CD
Changer option, you will not be able to use the Naviga-
tion system and the CD Player simultaneously. Always
remove the Navigation DVD before inserting another
disc.
4
SATELLITE RADIO — IF EQUIPPED
Satellite radio uses direct satellite to receiver broadcast-
ing technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius™ Satel-
lite Radio. This service offers up to 100 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for chil-
dren, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
RB1 Radio
The navigation system provides maps, turn identifica-
tion, selection menus and instructions for selecting a
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
178 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
System Activation
ESN/SID Access With RBB, RAH and RBK Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the Tape Eject or CD Eject (depend-
ing on the radio type) and Time buttons simultaneously
for 3 seconds. The first four digits of the twelve-digit
ESN/ SID number will be displayed. Press the SEEK UP
button to display the next four digits. Continue to press
the SEEK UP button until all twelve ESN/ SID digits have
been displayed. The SEEK DOWN will page down until
the first four digits are displayed. The radio will exit the
ESN/ SID mode when any other button is pushed, the
ignition is turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any
button was pushed.
To activate your Sirius Satellite Radio service, call the
toll-free number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site
at www.sirius.com. Please have the following informa-
tion available when activating your system:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/ Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/ SID).
2. Credit card information.
3. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ENS/SID)
The Electronic Serial Number/ Sirius Identification Num-
ber is needed to activate your Sirius Satellite Radio
system. To access the ESN/ SID, refer to the following
steps:
ESN/SID Access With RBP, RBU, RAZ, RB1 and
RBQ Radios
With the ignition switch in the ACCESSORY position and
the radio OFF, press the CD Eject and TIME buttons
simultaneously for 3 seconds. All twelve ESN/ SID num-
bers will be displayed. The radio will exit the ESN/ SID
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 179
mode when any other button is pushed, the ignition is
turned OFF, or 5 minutes has passed since any button
was pushed.
•
The current channel number will then be displayed
until an action occurs.
A CD or tape may remain in the radio while in the
Satellite radio mode.
Selecting Satellite Mode in RBB, RAH and RBK
Radios
Press the MODE button repeatedly until ЉS AЉ appears in
the display. A CD or tape may remain in the radio while
in the Satellite radio mode.
Selecting a Channel
Press and release the SEEK or TUNE buttons to search for
the next channel. Press the top of the button to search up
and the bottom of the button to search down. Holding the
TUNE button causes the radio to bypass channels until
the button is released.
4
Selecting Satellite Mode in RBP, RBU, RAZ, RB1
and RBQ Radios
Press the MODE button repeatedly until the word
ЉSIRIUSЉ appears in the display. These radios will also
display the following:
Press and release the SCAN button (if equipped) to
automatically change channels every 7 seconds. The
radio will pause on each channel for 7 seconds before
moving on to the next channel. The word ЉSCANЉ will
appear in the display between each channel change. Press
the SCAN button a second time to stop the search.
•
•
After 3 seconds, the current channel name and channel
number will be displayed for 5 seconds.
The current program type and channel number will
then be displayed for 5 seconds.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
180 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: Channels that may contain objectionable content
can be blocked. Contact Sirius Customer Care at 888-539-
7474 to discuss options for channel blocking or unblock-
ing. Please have your ESN/ SID information available.
PTY Button ؆SCAN؆
When the desired program type is obtained, press the
ЉSCANЉ button within five seconds. The radio will play 7
seconds of the selected channel before moving to the next
channel of the selected program type. Press the ЉSCANЉ
button a second time to stop the search.
Storing and Selecting Pre-Set Channels
In addition to the 10 AM and 10 FM pre-set stations, you
may also commit 10 satellite stations to push button
memory. These satellite channel pre-set stations will not
erase any AM or FM pre-set memory stations. Follow the
memory pre-set procedures that apply to your radio.
NOTE: Pressing the ЉSEEKЉ or ЉSCANЉ button while
performing a music type scan will change the channel by
one and stop the search. Pressing a pre-set memory
button during a music type scan, will call up the memory
channel and stop the search.
Using the PTY (Program Type) Button (if
equipped)
PTY Button ؆SEEK؆
Follow the PTY button instructions that apply to your
radio.
When the desired program is obtained, press the ЉSEEKЉ
button within five seconds. The channel will change to
the next channel that matches the program type selected.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 181
Satellite Antenna
•
Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location. Metal objects
placed within the line of sight of the antenna will cause
decreased performance. Larger luggage items should be
placed as far forward as possible. Do not place items
directly on or above the antenna.
CASSETTE TAPE AND PLAYER MAINTENANCE
To keep the cassette tapes and player in good condition,
take the following precautions:
1. Do not use cassette tapes longer than C-90; otherwise,
sound quality and tape durability will be greatly dimin-
ished.
4
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons.
2. Keep the cassette tape in its case to protect from
slackness and dust when it is not in use.
•
•
•
The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
3. Keep the cassette tape away from direct sunlight, heat
and magnetic fields such as the radio speakers.
Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
4. Before inserting a tape, make sure that the label is
adhering flat to the cassette.
Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
182 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
5. A loose tape should be corrected before use. To rewind
a loose tape, insert the eraser end of a pencil into the tape
drive gear and twist the pencil in the required directions.
CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE
To keep the CD/ DVD discs in good condition, take the
following precautions:
Maintain your cassette tape player. The head and capstan
shaft in the cassette player can pick up dirt or tape
deposits each time a cassette is played. The result of
deposits on the capstan shaft may cause the tape to wrap
around and become lodged in the tape transport. The
other adverse condition is low or “muddy” sound from
one or both channels, as if the treble tone control were
turned all the way down. To prevent this, you should
periodically clean the head with a commercially available
WET cleaning cassette.
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
3. Do not apply paper, paper CD labels, or tape to the
disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzine, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
As preventive maintenance, clean the head about every
30 hours of use. If you wait until the head becomes very
dirty (noticeably poor sound), it may not be possible to
remove all deposits with a simple WET cleaning cassette.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 183
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being On in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
4
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Air Conditioning
Manual Air Conditioning and Heating Controls
The Air Conditioning System allows you to balance the
temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating
throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the
instrument panel, above the radio.
The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains
R-134a, a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer
in the upper atmosphere.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
184 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The controls are as follows:
Mode Control (Air Direction)
The mode control allows you
Fan and Air conditioning Control
to choose from several pat-
terns of air distribution. You
can select either a primary
mode, as identified by the
symbols, or a blend of two of
these modes. The center point
between modes gives an even
blend of both modes. The
closer the control is to a par-
Use this control to regulate
the amount of air forced
through the system in any
mode you select. The fan
speeds to the left of the OFF
position are for Air Condi-
tioning. Choosing one of
these speeds turns on the air
conditioning compressor. The
ticular mode, the more air distribution you receive from
that mode.
fan speed increases as you
move the control to the left from the OFF position.
Panel
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct air
flow.
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
Fan speeds to the right of OFF are for heater or ventila-
tion operation. The fan speed increases as you move the
control to the right from the OFF position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 185
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demist outlets. Use this mode with maxi-
mum fan and temperature settings for best windshield
and side window defrosting.
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
both Mix and Defrost or a blend of these modes even if
the fan switch is not in the A/ C position. This dehumidi-
fies the air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel
economy, use these modes only when necessary.
4
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets and side
window demist outlets with
through the defrost outlet.
a
small amount
Air Outlets
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
be adjusted for direction and turned on or off to control
air flow.
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demist outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
A knob attached in the center of each instrument panel
outlet is used to adjust the airflow direction, and a knob
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
186 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
on the outer edge of each instrument panel outlet grille
opens or closes a shutter to turn airflow on or off through
that outlet.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/ C con-
denser: located in front of the radiator, for an accumula-
tion of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear seat passen-
gers, the center instrument panel outlets can be aimed, so
that the left center outlet is directed toward the right rear
passenger and the right center outlet is directed toward
the left rear passenger.
Circulation Control
Use this control to choose be-
tween outside air intake or
recirculation of the air inside
the vehicle. Only use the re-
circulate mode to temporarily
block out any outside odors,
smoke, or dust and to cool the
interior rapidly upon initial
start up in very hot or humid
weather.
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate
the temperature of the air in-
side the passenger compart-
ment. The blue area of the
scale indicates cooler tem-
peratures while the red area
indicates warmer tempera-
tures.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 187
This control only operates in the Outside Air and Recir-
culate modes; there is no in between position. Do not
place the control between these positions.
If the mode control is in the range between Mix and
Defrost and you choose the recirculate mode, the mode
control knob will automatically move to the left of the
Mix position.
NOTE: Continuous use of the recirculate mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
NOTE: If you choose Defrost mode and the Circulation
control is in the recirculate Mode, the system will auto-
matically switch to the Outside Air mode and the knob
will move to that position.
4
In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculate
position will cause windows to fog on the inside because
of moisture build up inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, select the Outside Air position.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 189
Window Fogging
Summer Operation
Vehicle side windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
rainy or humid weather. To clear the windows, use the
A/ C, PANEL and blower controls. Direct the panel
outlets toward the side windows. Do not use recirculate
without A/ C for long periods as fogging may occur.
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a high-
quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for
protection against overheating. A 50% concentration is
recommended.
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly re-
moved by using the defrost position.
Outside Air Intake
4
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, directly in front of the wind-
shield, is free of ice, slush, snow or other obstructions
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air-intake plenum
may reduce air flow and plug the plenum water drains.
If the fogging problem persists, clean the inside window
surfaces. The cause of undue fogging may be dirt collect-
ing on the inside surface of the glass
NOTE: In cold weather, the use of the recirculate
position will cause windows to fog on the inside because
of moisture build up inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, use the Outside Air position.
The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use
only a low blower speed for the first few minutes of
vehicle operation.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
190 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is at each end of the
instrument panel. These nonadjustable outlets direct air
toward the side windows when the system is in either the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Electric Rear Window Defroster
The push-button is located at the center of the
instrument panel, below the radio. Press this but-
ton to turn on the rear window defroster, and the
optional electric remote control heated mirrors. An amber
light shows that the defroster is on.
Rear Defroster Switch
NOTE: The defroster turns off automatically after 10
minutes of operation. Each following activation of the
defroster will last for five minutes.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 191
CAUTION!
To avoid damaging the electrical conductors, do not
use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive window
cleaners on the interior surface of the rear window.
Labels can be peeled off after soaking with warm
water.
4
Rear Wiper/Washer Switch
A push-button at the center of the instrument panel,
below the radio, turns the rear wiper ON or OFF. When
this switch is pressed the rear wiper will operate at a
fixed interval of about 4 seconds between wipes.
Rear Wiper/Washer Switch
Press and hold the switch as long as spray is
desired. If the switch is depressed while the wiper
is on, the wiper will operate for a few seconds after
the switch is released then resume the previously set
mode of intermittent wiper.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
192 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Adding Washer Fluid
The fluid reservoir for the windshield washers and the
rear window washer is shared. It is located in the rear of
the engine compartment on the passenger side and
should be checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill
the reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radia-
tor antifreeze) and operate the system for a few seconds
to flush out the residual water.
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
194 STARTING AND OPERATING
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 195
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
196 STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Automatic Transaxle
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
The gear selector must be in the NEUTRAL or PARK
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of Park.
CAUTION!
Long periods of engine idling, especially at high
engine speeds can cause excessive exhaust tempera-
tures which can damage your vehicle. Do not leave
your vehicle unattended with the engine running.
Manual Transaxle
Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake,
press the clutch pedal to the floor and place the gear
selector in NEUTRAL.
NOTE: The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal
is pressed to the floor.
WARNING!
Normal Starting
Do not leave children or animals inside parked
vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build up may
cause serious injury or death.
Normal Starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal.
Simply turn the ignition switch to the “START’” position
and release when the engine starts. If the engine has not
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 197
started within 3 seconds, slightly depress the accelerator
pedal while continuing to crank. If the engine fails to start
within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the “OFF”
position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the normal
starting procedure.
Extremely Cold Weather (below Ϫ20°F or Ϫ29°C)
To insure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of an
externally powered electric engine block heater (available
from your dealer) is recommended.
If Engine Fails to Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure, it may be flooded.
Push the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and
hold it there. Crank the engine for no more than 15
seconds. This should clear any excess fuel in case the
engine is flooded. Leave the ignition key in the ON
position, release the accelerator pedal and repeat the
“NORMAL STARTING” procedure.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
axle cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-
erly, so follow the procedure carefully. See section 6
of this manual for jump starting instructions.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
198 STARTING AND OPERATING
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
WARNING!
warms up.
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
Turbocharger “Cool Down”
NOTE: Letting the engine idle after severe operation
allows the turbine housing to cool to normal operating
temperature.
The following chart should be used as a guide in deter-
minning the amount of engine idle time required to
sufficiently cool down the turbocharger before shut
down, depending upon the type of driving and the
amount of cargo.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 199
TURBOCHARGER ؆COOL DOWN؆ CHART
Driving Conditions Idle Time (in minutes) Before Shut Down
Normal Driving
Aggressive Driving or Heavily Loaded
Trailer Tow
Not required.
3
5
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE — IF EQUIPPED
•
Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the vehicle has
come to a complete stop and the engine is at idle
speed.
5
CAUTION!
•
•
Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL into
any forward gear when the engine is above idle speed.
Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
•
Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down
while shifting out of Park.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
200 STARTING AND OPERATING
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK and the shift knob push button
is out. It also prevents shifting out of PARK unless the
key is in the OFF or ON positions.
WARNING!
It is dangerous to shift the selector lever out of “P” or
“N” if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If
your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal, the
vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-
verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when
the engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
Four Speed Automatic Transaxle
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
The electronically controlled transaxle provides a precise
shift schedule. The transaxle electronics are self calibrat-
ing; therefore, the first few shifts on a new vehicle may be
somewhat abrupt. This is a normal condition, and preci-
sion shifts will develop within a few shift cycles.
This system prevents you from moving the gear shift out
of Park and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ON positions. Always depress the brake
pedal first, before moving the gear selector out of PARK.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 201
Reset Mode
NOTE: Even if the transaxle can be reset, it is recom-
mended that you visit a dealer at your earliest possible
convenience. Your dealer has diagnostic equipment to
determine if the problem could recur.
The transaxle is monitored electronically for abnormal
conditions. If a condition is detected that could cause
damage, the transaxle shifts automatically into second
gear. The transaxle remains in second gear despite the
forward gear selected. Park (P), Reverse (R), and Neutral
(N) will continue to operate. This second gear limp-in
feature allows the vehicle to be driven to a dealer for
service without damaging the transaxle.
If the transaxle cannot be reset, dealer service is required.
Gear Ranges For Four Speed Automatic
Transaxle
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
5
NEUTRAL positions into another gear range.
In the event that the problem has been momentary, the
transaxle can be reset to regain all forward gears.
“P” Park
Supplements the parking brake by locking the transmis-
sion. The engine can be started in this range. Never use P
(Park) while the vehicle is in motion. Apply the parking
brake when leaving the vehicle in this range. Always
apply the parking brake first, and then place the selector
in P (Park) position.
Stop the vehicle and shift into Park (P).
Turn the Key to OFF then restart the engine.
Shift into D and resume driving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
202 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
When shifting into P (Park), depress the button on the
shift lever and firmly move the lever all the way
forward until it stops.
WARNING!
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the vehicle into P (Park), remove the key from
the ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the
key is removed from the ignition, the transmission
shift lever is locked in the P (Park) position, securing
the vehicle against unwanted movement. Further-
more, you should never leave children unattended
inside a vehicle.
•
•
Look at the shift indicator window on the console to
ensure it is in the P (Park) position.
When engaged in P (Park), you will not be able to
move the shifter rearward without depressing the shift
lever button.
CAUTION!
Before moving the shift lever out of P (Park), you
must turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the
steering wheel and shift lever are released. Other-
wise, damage to the steering column or shifter could
result.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the transmission shift lever into the P
(Park) position:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 203
“R” Reverse
“3” Drive
Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
This range eliminates shifts into Overdrive. The transaxle
will operate normally in first and second while in this
range.
“N” Neutral
Engine may be started in this range.
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-
mance, fuel economy, and extend transaxle life by reduc-
ing excessive shifting and heat build up.
“D” Overdrive
This range should be used for most city and highway
driving. It provides smoothest up shifts and down shifts
and best fuel economy.
5
Use the “3” range when descending steep grades to
prevent brake system distress.
When frequent transaxle shifting occurs while using the
Overdrive range, such as when operating the vehicle
under heavy loading conditions (in hilly terrain, travel-
ing into strong head winds, or while towing trailers), use
the “3” range.
“1” Low
This range should be used for maximum engine braking
when descending steep grades. In this range, up shifts
will occur only to prevent engine over speed while down
shifts from 2nd to first will occur as early as possible.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
204 STARTING AND OPERATING
AUTOSTICK — IF EQUIPPED
You can shift in or out of the autostick mode at any time
without taking your foot off the accelerator pedal. If you
choose the Overdrive mode, the transmission will oper-
ate automatically; shifting between the four available
gears. When you wish to engage autostick, simply move
the shift lever to the AUTOSTICK position. The transmis-
sion will remain in the current gear until an upshift or
downshift is chosen.
Autostick is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
manual gear shifting capability to provide you with more
control. Autostick allows you to maximize engine brak-
ing, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
trailer towing, and many other situations.
Move the lever back to the Overdrive position to shift out
of the Autostick mode.
Autostick Operation
The Autostick position is just below the Overdrive posi-
tion and is identified by the word “AUTOSTICK”. When
you place the shift lever in the Autostick position, it can
be moved from side to side. Moving the lever to the left
(-) triggers a downshift and to the right (+) an upshift.
The gear position will be shown in the transmission gear
display, located in the instrument cluster.
Autostick General Information
•
The transmission will automatically upshift from first
to second gear and from second to third gear when
engine speed reaches about 6300 RPM.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 205
•
•
Downshifts from third to second gear above 74 mph
(119 km/ h) and from second to first gear above 41
mph (66 km/ h) will be ignored.
Downshifting out of third gear will turn off the speed
control.
•
•
If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode
and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
You can start out in first, second, or third gear. Shifting
into fourth gear can occur only after vehicle speed
reaches 15 mph (24 km/ h).
If the system detects a problem it will disable the
Autostick mode and the transmission will return to the
automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
•
•
•
The transmission will automatically downshift to first
gear when coming to a stop.
5
Starting out in third gear is helpful in snowy or icy
conditions.
MANUAL TRANSAXLE OPERATION
NOTE: The parking brake should be engaged and the
gear selector placed in REVERSE before leaving the
vehicle, especially on an incline.
While in the Autostick mode, Speed Control will only
function in third or fourth gear.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
206 STARTING AND OPERATING
Fully depress the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As
you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelera-
tor pedal.
For most city driving you will find it easier to use only
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, 5th gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal, or
try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch pedal
partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear on the
clutch.
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NOTE: During cold weather, until the transaxle lubri-
cant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift
efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle.
Use each gear in numerical order - do not skip a gear. Be
sure the transaxle is in FIRST gear, (not THIRD), when
starting from a standing position. Damage to the clutch
can result from starting in THIRD.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 207
2.4 Liter Turbo— If Equipped
the shifter lever all the way to the right to avoid acciden-
tally selecting THIRD gear. Also, use care when selecting
FIRST gear to avoid accidentally selecting REVERSE.
When moving the shifter lever into REVERSE press the
lever to the left until the resistance is overcome. When the
ignition switch is in the ON position, a chime will sound
to confirm that reverse has been selected and the backup
lights will illuminate.
5
NOTE: Listen for the audible chime to confirm RE-
VERSE gear is properly selected. Never shift into RE-
VERSE until the vehicle has come to a complete stop.
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transaxle for optimal fuel economy,
it should be upshifted as listed in table 1.
The neutral position of the shift lever is located between
THIRD and FOURTH gear. This is the position the shifter
lever will return to automatically when neutral is se-
lected. When shifting into FIFTH gear, be sure to press
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
208 STARTING AND OPERATING
TABLE 1-MANUAL TRANSAXLE NORMAL AC-
CELERATION AND CRUISE SHIFT SPEEDS
TABLE 2-MANUAL TRANSAXLE MAXIMUM PER-
FORMANCE SHIFT SPEEDS
IN mph (km/h)
EN-
IN mph (km/h)
ENGINE
SIZE
1 to 2
2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
GINE MODE 1 to 2 2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
SIZE
30
60
85
115
2.4L
Accel 15 (24) 25 (40) 40 (65) 45 (72)
Cruise 15 (24) 25 (40) 42 (68) 45 (72)
2.4L
Turbo
(48)
(97)
(136)
(185)
If you exceed these speeds, you may notice the engine cut
in and out. This is caused by an electronic limiter in the
engine computer. The engine will run normally when
you reduce engine speed.
2.4L
Non-
Turbo
Accel 15 (24) 25 (40) 33 (53) 44 (70)
Cruise 16 (26) 20 (32) 28 (45) 38 (61)
For improved performance, your manual transaxle may
be upshifted up to the maximum speeds listed in table 2
(within legal speed limits).
Downshifting
Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
prolong engine life.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 209
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
on. It does not show the degree of brake application.
CAUTION!
If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high an engine speed, you could
damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle is
moving, a chime will sound to alert the driver. The chime
will sound up to 10 times or until the vehicle has
returned to a stop.
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift
down to 2nd or 1st when descending a steep grade.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is set. To set the parking brake, pull up firmly on
the lever. Also place the gear selector in the Park position
(automatic transaxle) or Reverse (manual transaxle). To
release the parking brake, apply the brake pedal, pull up
slightly on the lever, then depress the button on the end
of the lever and push the lever fully down toward the
floor.
5
When turning a corner, or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be overbur-
dened.
PARKING BRAKE
When the parking brake is applied with the
ignition on, the Brake Light in the instrument
cluster will come on.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
210 STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: The parking brake lever will not release unless
the lever is pulled up slightly past its applied position.
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the gear selector in Park, otherwise
the load on the automatic transaxle locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the selector out of Park. As
an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a
uphill grade.
You should always apply the parking brake before leav-
ing the vehicle.
Parking Brake Lever
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 211
BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING!
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications
with the engine off), the brakes will still function. How-
ever, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much
greater than that required with the power system oper-
ating.
•
•
Leaving children in a vehicle unattended is dan-
gerous for a number of reasons. A child or others
could be injured. Children should be warned not
to touch the parking brake or the gear selector.
Don’t leave the keys in the ignition. A child could
operate power windows, other controls, or move
the vehicle.
5
WARNING!
Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
212 STARTING AND OPERATING
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capa-
bility, the remaining system will still function with some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident
by increased pedal travel during application and greater
pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the
malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake
fluid in the master cylinder drops, the brake warning
indicator will light.
During stops where ABS is activated, a vibration of the
brake pedal may be felt and associated system noises
may be heard.
NOTE: Pumping of the brake pedal will diminish the
effectiveness of Anti-lock brakes and may lead to an
accident. Pumping makes the stopping distance longer.
Just press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to
slow down or stop.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped
The ABS gives increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking
conditions to prevent wheel lock up.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
tires must be properly inflated to produce accurate
signals for the computer. However, the system will
compensate when the compact spare is in use.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 213
POWER ASSISTED STEERING
WARNING!
The power assisted steering system of your vehicle
provides mechanical steering capability in the event
power assist is lost.
•
•
•
Anti-lock system (ABS) cannot prevent the natu-
ral laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor
can it increase braking or steering efficiency be-
yond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle
brakes and tires or the traction afforded.
If for some reason the hydraulic pressure is interrupted,
it will still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these
conditions you will observe a substantial increase in
steering effort.
The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydro-
planing. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
5
The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
214 STARTING AND OPERATING
TRACTION CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
The Traction Control System will improve acceleration
and steering on slippery surfaces by reducing tire spin.
The system reduces wheel slip and maintains traction at
the driving (front) wheels by engaging the brake on the
wheel that is losing traction. When this occurs the TRAC
indicator light located above the instrument cluster
odometer will flash. The system operates at speeds below
40 mph (64 km/ h).
Traction Control Switch
A push-button at the center of the instrument panel,
below the radio, turns the Traction Control System ON or
OFF.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 215
The system is always in the “ON” mode unless:
This is to prevent overheating of the brake system and is
a normal condition. The system will remain disabled for
about 4 minutes until the brakes have cooled. The system
will automatically reactivate and turn off the TRAC OFF
light.
•
The TRAC OFF switch has been used to turn the
system off;
•
•
•
There is a Anti-Lock Brake System malfunction;
There is a Traction Control System malfunction;
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, ice, or snow, turn
the Traction Control System Off before attempting to
“rock” the vehicle free.
The system has been automatically deactivated to
prevent damage to the brake system due to overheated
brake temperatures.
5
NOTE: Extended heavy use of Traction Control may
cause the system to deactivate and turn on the TRAC
OFF Light located in the instrument cluster.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
216 STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
•
•
•
•
European Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ЉPЉ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/ 65R15 96H
LT(Light Truck)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-
ing the size designation. Example: LT235/ 85R16.
Temporary Spare tires are high pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-
tion. Example: T145/ 80D18 103M.
NOTE:
•
P(Passenger)-Metric tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P” molded
into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Ex-
ample: P215/ 65R15 95H.
High Flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 217
Tire Sizing Chart
Size Designation:
EXAMPLE:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
؆....blank....؆ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light Truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary Spare tire
31 = Overall Diameter in Inches (in)
5
215 = Section Width in Milimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect Ratio in Percent (%)
—Ratio of section height to section width of tire.
10.5 = Section Width in Inches (in)
R = Construction Code
—ЉRЉ means Radial Construction.
—ЉDЉ means Diagonal or Bias Construction.
15 = Rim Diameter in Inches (in)
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
218 STARTING AND OPERATING
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
—A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry.
H = Speed Symbol
—A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding
to its load index under certain operating conditions.
—The maximum speed corresponding to the Speed Symbol should only be achieved un-
der specified operating conditions. (ie. tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions and
posted speed limits).
Load Identification:
؆....blank....؆ = Absence of any text on sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) Tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra Load (or Reinforced) Tire
Light Load = Light Load Tire
C,D,E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum Load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry.
Maximum Pressure — Maximum Pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 219
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side then you will find it on the inboard side
of the tire.
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire
however the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN including
date code located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
—This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards, and is approved for highway use.
5
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location.(2 digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size.(2 digits)
ABCD = Code used by tire manufacturer.(1 to 4 digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured.(2 digits)
—01 means the year 2001.
—Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have 1 number to represent the year in
which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
220 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure for pas-
senger cars is listed on either the face of the driver’s door
or the driver’s side “B” pillar. For vehicles other than
passenger cars, the cold tire inflation pressures are listed
on either the “B” pillar, the Certification Label or in the
Tire Inflation Pressures brochure in the glove compart-
ment.
Tire Placard Location
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 221
Tire and Loading Information Placard
4) the cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear
and spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and the Vehicle Loading section of
this manual.
5
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWR’s) for the front and rear
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWR’s, vehicle loading and trailer towing, see the
Vehicle Loading section of this manual.
Tire and Loading Information
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) the total weight your vehicle can carry
3) the tire size designed for your vehicle
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
222 STARTING AND OPERATING
lbs.” on the Tire and Loading Information placard. The
combined weight of occupants, cargo/ luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occu-
pants and cargo should never exceed XXX pounds” on
your vehicle’s placard.
NOTE: The following table shows examples on how to
calculate total load, cargo/ luggage and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. This table is for illustra-
tion purposes only and may not be accurate for the
seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and pas-
sengers from XXX kilograms or XXX pounds.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb.
passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo
and luggage load capacity is 650 lb. (since 5 x 150 = 750,
and 1400 – 750 = 650 lb.)
NOTE: For the following example the combined weight
of occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs. (392
Kg).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 223
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
224 STARTING AND OPERATING
1. Safety—
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
WARNING!
Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can cause
accidents.
• Under inflation increases tire flexing and can result in
tire failure.
• Over inflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuck holes can cause
damage that results in tire failure.
TIRES—GENERAL INFORMATION
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems.
You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Over inflated or under inflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in loss of
vehicle control.
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to
the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the right or
left.
Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-
mended cold tire inflation pressure.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 225
2. Economy—
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure con-
ditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
3. Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability—
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
5
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure for passenger cars
is listed on either the face of the driver’s door or the
driver’s side “B” pillar. For vehicles other than passenger
cars, the cold tire inflation pressures are listed on either
the “B” pillar, the Certification Label or in the Tire
Inflation Pressures brochure in the glove compartment.
Tire Placard Location
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
226 STARTING AND OPERATING
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are under inflated.
(1 km) after a 3 hour period. The cold tire inflation
pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-
sure molded into the tire side wall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12° F (7° C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage especially in
the winter.
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-
ways reinstall the valve stem cap–if equipped. This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Example: If garage temperature = 68° F (20° C) and the
outside temperature = 32° F (0° C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12° F (7° C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least 3 hours, or driven less than 1mile
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 227
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-
mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Don’t drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above 75
mph (120 km/h).
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-
tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
loading may be required for high speed vehicle opera-
tion. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
228 STARTING AND OPERATING
Radial-Ply Tires
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and rein-
stalled at the first opportunity.
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Al-
ways use radial ply tires in sets of four (or 6, in case
of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
WARNING!
Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than 50 mph
(80 km/h). Temporary-use spare tires have limited
tread life. When two or more tread wear indicators
appear in adjacent grooves, the temporary use spare
tire needs to be replaced. Be sure to follow the
warnings which apply to your spare. Failure to do so
could result in spare tire failure and loss of vehicle
control.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 229
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Limited Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use
on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limited use
spare tire warning label located on the limited use spare
tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on vehicle
at the first opportunity.
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/ wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
5
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
230 STARTING AND OPERATING
See the paragraph on Freeing A Stuck Vehicle in Section
6 of this manual.
WARNING!
The limited use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 60 mph (100 km/h). Keep inflated to the cold
tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire
placard or limited use spare tire and wheel assembly.
Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first
opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure
to do so could result in loss of vehicle control.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55 km/h) when you are stuck. And
don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter
what the speed.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels above 35 mph (55 km/ h).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 231
Tread Wear Indicators
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manu-
facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-
lent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed (see the paragraph on tread
wear indicators). Refer to the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard for the size designation of your tire. The
service description and load identification will be found
on the original equipment tire. Failure to use equivalent
replacement tires may adversely affect the safety, han-
dling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend that you
contact your original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer with any questions you may have on tire specifi-
cations or capability.
5
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves and will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/ 16 inch (2 mm). When the indicators appear
in 2 or more adjacent grooves, the tire should be replaced.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
232 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than that
specified for your vehicle. Some combinations of
unapproved tires and wheels may change suspen-
sion dimensions and performance characteristics,
resulting in changes to steering, handling, and brak-
ing of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable
handling and stress to steering and suspension com-
ponents. You could lose control and have an accident
resulting in serious injury or death. Use only the tire
and wheel sizes with load ratings approved for your
vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or capacity,
other than what was originally equipped on your
vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load index could
result in tire overloading and failure. You could lose
control and have an accident.
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer read-
ings.
Alignment And Balance
Poor suspension alignment may result in:
•
•
Fast tire wear.
Uneven tire wear, such as feathering and one-sided
wear.
•
Vehicle pull to right or left.
Tires may also cause the vehicle to pull to the left or right.
Alignment will not correct this condition. See your dealer
for proper diagnosis.
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 233
Improper alignment will not cause vehicle vibration.
Vibration may be a result of tire and wheel out-of-
balance. Proper balancing will reduce vibration and
avoid tire cupping and spotty wear.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during winter. Standard tires are of the all season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire side wall.
TIRE CHAINS
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recom-
mended.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of 4, failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
5
CAUTION!
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph (120
km/ h).
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
234 STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Rotation Recommendations
Follow the recommended tire rotation frequency for your
type of driving found in the “Maintenance Schedules”
Section of this manual. More frequent rotation is permis-
sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual
wear should be corrected before rotating. The suggested
rotation method is the “forward-cross” shown in the
diagram.
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates, and tend to develop irregular wear pat-
terns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 235
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
The use of high quality unleaded gasoline having an
octane rating of 91 is recommended but not required.
High quality unleaded gasoline having a minumum
octane rating of 87 may safely be used for your vehicle.
Use of these lower octane gasolines, however, may result
in reduced acceleration performance.
2.4L Standard Engine and 2.4L Standard Turbo
Engine
Your vehicle is designed to meet all emis-
sion regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy when using high quality regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
87. The use of premium gasoline is not
recommended. The use of premium gaso-
line will provide no benefit over high quality regular
gasolines, and in some circumstances, may result in
poorer performance.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
5
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the ap-
propriate octane rating for your engine) before consider-
ing service for the vehicle.
2.4L High Output Turbo Engine
Your engine is designed to meet all emis-
sion regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy and performance when using
high quality unleaded gasoline having an
octane rating of 91. The purchase of higher
octane is not required.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
236 STARTING AND OPERATING
Over 40 automobile manufacturers around the world
have issued and endorsed consistent gasoline specifica-
tions (the World Wide Fuel Charter, WWFC) to define
fuel properties necessary to deliver enhanced emissions,
engine performance, and durability for your vehicle. The
manufacturer recommends the use of gasolines that meet
the WWFC specifications if they are available.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-
genates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygen-
ates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol. Use of
these blends may result in starting and driveability
problems and may damage critical fuel system com-
ponents.
Reformulated gasolines contain oxygenates, and are spe-
cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-
prove air quality.
The manufacturer supports the use of reformulated gaso-
lines. Properly blended reformulated gasolines will pro-
vide excellent performance and durability of engine and
fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/ gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 237
MMT In Gasoline
Materials Added to Fuel
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane num-
ber. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have shown
to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission system
performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer recom-
mends using gasolines without MMT. Since the MMT
content of gasoline may not be indicated on the pump,
you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or not
his/ her gasoline contains MMT.
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore
you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
5
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
•
The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance,
damage the emission control system.
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformu-
lated gasolines.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
238 STARTING AND OPERATING
•
An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your dealer for service assistance.
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
•
The use of fuel additives which are now being sold as
octane enhancers is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
•
Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period. If the vehicle is
stopped in an open area with the engine running for
more than a short period, adjust the ventilation system
to force fresh, outside air into the vehicle.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 239
•
•
Guard against carbon monoxide with proper mainte-
nance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the passen-
ger’s side of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged,
be sure the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap
tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler cap door
reinforcement.
Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous ex-
haust gases from entering the vehicle.
5
ADDING FUEL
CAUTION!
The fuel tank filler tube has a restricting door about 2
inches (50 mm) inside the opening. If using a portable
container, it should have a flexible nozzle long enough to
force open the restricting door.
Damage to the fuel system or emission control
system could result from using an improper fuel
tank filler tube cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap
could let impurities into the fuel system.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
240 STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
CAUTION!
•
•
Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction
Indicator Light to turn on.
Never add fuel when the engine is running. This
is in violation of most state and federal fire
regulations and will cause the malfunction indi-
cator light to turn on.
CAUTION!
To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap about 1/ 4 turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that cap is properly
tightened.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the Malfunction
Indicator Light will come on. Be sure the gas cap is
tightened every time the vehicle is refueled.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 241
TRAILER TOWING
WARNING!
In this section you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully re-
view this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
Perform maintenance services as prescribed in the main-
tenance schedules manual. When your vehicle is used for
trailer towing, never exceed the gross axle weight rating
(GAWR) by the addition of:
VEHICLE LOADING
5
Vehicle Loading Capacities
Front Seat Occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Rear Seat Occupants . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Luggage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 lbs (52 kg)
Rated Vehicle Capacity. . . . . . . . . . . . . 865 lb (392 kg)
•
•
The tongue weight of the trailer.
The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
•
Remember that everything put in or on the trailer adds
to the load on your vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
242 STARTING AND OPERATING
Warranty
•
The “D” range can be selected when towing. However,
if frequent shifting occurs while in this range, the “3”
range must be selected.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning ve-
hicles used for trailer towing. However the following
conditions must be met:
NOTE: Using the “3” range while operating the vehicle
under heavy operating conditions will improve perfor-
mance and extend transaxle life by reducing excessive
shifting and heat build up.
•
•
•
The maximum frontal area of the trailer cannot exceed
20 square feet (1.86 square meters).
The maximum trailer load for your vehicle is 1,000 lbs
(454 kg).
WARNING!
If using a manual transaxle vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in FIRST gear to avoid excessive
clutch slippage.
Connecting trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydraulic
brake lines can overload your brake system and
cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you
need them and could have an accident.
•
The trailer tongue load must be considered as part of
the combined weight of occupants and cargo, and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to the Tire–
Safety Information Section in this manual.
•
Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
STARTING AND OPERATING 243
•
•
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer
size, stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are
recommended for motoring safety.
NOTE: Extended driving at high RPM should be
avoided to prevent excess heat generation. A reduction in
vehicle speed may be required to avoid extended driving
at high RPM. Return to a higher gear range or vehicle
speed when road conditions and RPM level allows.
The automatic transaxle fluid and filter should be
changed if you REGULARLY tow a trailer for more
than 45 minutes of continuous operation. See Schedule
“B” in section 8 of this manual for transaxle fluid
change intervals.
5
NOTE: Check the automatic transaxle fluid level before
towing.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Autostick. By using
the Autostick modes, and selecting a specific gear range,
frequent shifting can be avoided. The highest gear range
should be selected that allows for adequate performance.
For example, choose “4” if the desired speed can be
maintained. Choose “3” or “2” if needed to maintain the
desired speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
246 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
flasher system will continue to operate with the ignition
key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the flasher may wear down
your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-
tion.
Hazard Flasher Switch
•
•
On the highways — Slow down.
The flasher switch is on top of the steering column,
just behind the steering wheel. Depress the switch
and both cluster indicators and all front and rear direc-
tional signals will flash. Depress the switch again to turn
Hazard Warning Flashers off.
In city traffic — While stopped, put transaxle in
neutral, but do not increase engine idle speed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 247
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. Pull over and stop the vehicle.
Idle the vehicle with the air conditioner turned off until
the pointer drops back into the normal range. If the
pointer remains on the H (red) mark, turn the engine off
immediately and call for service.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”, pull
over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the
air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. After appropriate action
has been taken, if the pointer remains on the “H”,
turn the engine off immediately, and call for service.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/ C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
the fan control to High. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
248 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to Section 7, Maintenance, of
this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling
System Pressure Cap paragraph.
WARNING!
•
•
Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous.
The vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you.
You could be crushed. Never put any part of your
body under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start
or run the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If
you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 249
Jack Location
Spare Tire Stowage
The jack and jack-handle are stowed behind the right rear
side trim panel in the cargo area.
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear of the
vehicle by means of a hook/ basket mechanism. To re-
move or stow the compact spare, use the jack handle to
rotate the “spare tire drive” nut. The nut is located under
the rear scuff plate at the right rear of the cargo area, just
inside the liftgate opening.
6
Jack Location
Do not attempt to raise this vehicle using a bumper jack.
Lowering Spare Tire
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
250 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Removal
WARNING!
Lift up the cover and fit the jack-handle over the drive
nut. Rotate the nut to the left until you can remove the
swivel hook from the stowage basket. Swing the basket
down to remove the compact spare tire.
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
CAUTION!
•
Turn on the Hazard Warning Flasher.
Block both the front and rear
The hook is designed for use with the jack handle
only. Use of an air wrench or other power tools is not
recommended and can damage the winch.
•
of the wheel diagonally oppo-
site the jacking position. For
example, if changing the right
front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
Preparations For Jacking
Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoid ice or
slippery areas, set the parking brake and place the gear
selector in PARK (automatic transaxle) or REVERSE
(manual transaxle). Turn OFF the ignition.
•
Passengers should not remain in the vehicle while the
vehicle is being jacked.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 251
Jacking Instructions
3. There are two front jacking locations on each side of
the body and rear jacking locations located on the trailing
arm bracket under the triangular cut out symbol. Turn
the jack screw to the right until the jack head is properly
engaged with the lift area closest to the wheel to be
changed.
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
stowage bag.
NOTE: If equipped with a center cap that covers the
wheel nuts, pry off the cap using the small end of the lug
wrench. To reinstall the cap, make sure it is properly
lined up before pushing it on to the wheel.
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
6
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on the
crossmember below the radiator, on the front sus-
pension crossmember, or on the rear axle assembly.
Jacking Locations
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
252 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel
covers where applicable off the hub. Install the spare
wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid
the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten
the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
4. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the right,
using the swivel wrench. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
WARNING!
WARNING!
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
NOTE: The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the
wheel nuts. When reinstalling original wheel, properly
align the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the wheel
cover onto the wheel, then install the wheel nuts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 253
6. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
9. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, have the
tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
7. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench
while tightening the wheel nuts. Alternate nuts until each
nut has been tightened twice. Correct wheel nut torque is
100 ft. lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have
tightened the nuts correctly, have them checked with a
torque wrench by your dealer or at a service station.
WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immedi-
ately.
8. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is
free. Stow the lug wrench, and jack in their designated
location. Secure all parts using the means provided.
10. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
pressure as required.
6
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the ve-
hicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
254 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES DUE TO A LOW
BATTERY
WARNING!
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-
axle cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improp-
erly, so follow this procedure carefully.
WARNING!
Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever
the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition
switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.
1. Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make an
inadvertent electrical contact.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 255
2. When boosting from a battery in another vehicle, park
that vehicle within booster cable reach but without
letting the vehicles touch. Set parking brake, place auto-
matic transaxle in PARK (manual transaxle in NEU-
TRAL) and turn ignition to OFF for both vehicles.
WARNING!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing.
Don’t lean over battery when attaching clamps or
allow the clamps to touch each other. If acid splashes
in eyes or on skin, flush the contaminated area
immediately with large quantities of water.
3. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the jumper cable to the positive jump start terminal,
located near the Power Distribution Center, of the vehicle
with the discharged battery.
A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flam-
mable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery or
any other booster source with an output that exceeds
12 volts.
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
256 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the negative jump start
terminal, located near the hood release latch, of the
vehicle with the discharged battery. Make sure you have
a good contact.
6. If the vehicle is equipped with Sentry Key Immobi-
lizer, turn the ignition switch to the ON position for 3
seconds before moving the ignition switch to the START
position.
7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the se-
quence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-
pery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull errati-
cally to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels.
Negative Jump Start
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 257
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is danger-
ous. Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of
the front wheels. You could lose control of the
vehicle and possibly have an accident. Accelerate
slowly and carefully whenever there is likely to be
poor traction (ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
2. Slow down if road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become
visible.
4. Keep tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
6
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Con-
trol, turn the system OFF before attempting to “rock” the
vehicle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
258 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between Reverse
and First gear. Usually the least accelerator pedal pres-
sure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the
wheels is most effective.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transaxle overheating and failure. It can
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
35 mph (55km/h).
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
With Ignition Key
WARNING!
Four Speed Automatic Transaxle
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-
ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-
age or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 35 mph (55km/h) when you are stuck. And don’t
let anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Your vehicle may be towed under the following condi-
tions: The steering column must be unlocked and the
gear selector must be in NEUTRAL, the distance to be
towed must not exceed 100 miles (160 km), and the
towing speed must not exceed 44 mph (72 km/ h). If the
transaxle is not operative, or if the vehicle is to be towed
more than 100 miles (160 km), the vehicle must be towed
with the front wheels off the ground to avoid damage to
the transaxle.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 259
Manual Transaxle
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
position, not the ACCESSORY position. Make certain the
transaxle remains in NEUTRAL.
Your vehicle may be towed if the gearshift lever is in
NEUTRAL. If the transaxle is not operative, the vehicle
must be towed with the front wheels off the ground.
All Transaxles
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. A dolly should be
used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised.
Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent dam-
age to the vehicle.
CAUTION!
If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the OFF position, not in
the LOCK or ACCESSORY positions.
6
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
If your vehicle is equipped with a manual transaxle, it
may be towed at any legal highway speed, for any
distance, if the transaxle is in neutral.
Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when
towing. When securing vehicle to flat bed truck, do
not attach to front or rear suspension components.
Damage to your vehicle may result from improper
towing.
If the ignition key is not available, vehicles with auto-
matic transaxles can not be flat towed at any time.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
262 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 263
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
266 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
CAUTION!
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard
diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transmission control systems. When these systems are
operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent
performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-
sions well within current government regulations.
•
•
Prolonged driving with the “Malfunction Indica-
tor Light” on could cause further damage to the
emission control system. It could also affect fuel
economy and driveability. The vehicle must be
serviced before any emissions tests can be per-
formed.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light.” It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-
though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your dealer for service as soon as
possible.
If the “Malfunction Indicator Light” is flashing
while the engine is running, severe catalytic con-
verter damage and power loss will soon occur.
Immediate service is required.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 267
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key actuated test
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD system is ready, you must do
the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
For states which have an I/ M (Inspection and
Maintenance) requirement, this check verifies the
following: the MIL (Malfunction Indicator Lamp)
is functioning and is not on when the engine is running,
and that the OBD (On Board Diagnostic) system is ready
for testing.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see your MIL symbol come on as part of a normal
bulb check.
Normally, the OBD system will be ready. The OBD
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, if you recently had a dead battery, or a battery
replacement. If the OBD system should be determined
not ready for the I/ M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
7
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
268 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn off the
ignition key or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD system is not ready and you should not
proceed to the I/ M station.
during normal vehicle operation, you should have your
vehicle serviced before going to the I/ M station. The I/ M
station can fail your vehicle because the MIL symbol is on
with the engine running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn off the ignition key or start
the engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/ M station.
Use of genuine Mopar parts for normal/ scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to in-
sure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-Mopar parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
If your OBD system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
DEALER SERVICE
Your dealer has the qualified service personnel, special
tools and equipment to perform all service operations in
an expert manner. Service Manuals are available which
include detailed service information for your vehicle.
Refer to these manuals before attempting any procedure
yourself.
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD system is
ready or not ready, if the MIL symbol is illuminated
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 269
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
WARNING!
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the proper equipment.
If you have any doubt about your ability to perform
a service job, take your vehicle to a competent
mechanic.
Engine Oil
7
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
270 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The best time to check the engine oil level is about 5
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off or before
starting the engine after it has sat overnight.
dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at
the MIN mark will result in a MAX reading on these
engines.
CAUTION!
Overfilling the crankcase as indicated by an oil level
above the “Max” mark on the engine oil dipstick
will cause oil aeration, which can lead to loss of oil
pressure and an increase in oil temperature. This
could damage your engine.
Change Engine Oil
Road conditions and your kind of driving affects the
interval at which your oil should be changed. Check the
following list to decide if any apply to you.
Engine Oil Dipstick
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground, will
improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Maintain
the oil level between the MIN and MAX markings on the
•
•
Day and night temperatures are below 32°F (0°C).
Stop and Go driving.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 271
•
•
•
•
Extensive engine idling.
If none of these apply to you, and your vehicle is
equipped with a Non–Turbo Charged Engine then
change your engine oil at every interval shown on
schedule “A”—NON TURBO in the maintenance sched-
ule section of this manual.
Driving in dusty conditions.
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90°F (32°C).
If none of these apply to you, and your vehicle is
equipped with a Turbo Charged Engine change your
engine oil at every interval shown on schedule
“A”—TURBO in the maintenance schedule section of this
manual.
•
•
•
•
Trailer towing.
Taxi, Police or delivery service (commercial service).
Off-Road or desert operation.
NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change in-
tervals exceed 6000 miles (10 000 km) or 6 months
whichever comes first.
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
7
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first, and follow schedule “B—All
Engines” of the ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this
manual.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
272 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Engine Oil Selection
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
For best performance and maximum protection under all
types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only
recommends engine oils that are API certified and meet
the requirements of DaimlerChrysler Material Standard
MS-6395.
SAE 5W-30 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low tempera-
ture starting and vehicle fuel economy. Refer to your
engine oil filler cap for the recommended engine oil
viscosity for your vehicle.
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
For information on engine oil filler cap location, see the
Engine Compartment illustration in this section.
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
Lubricants which do not have both, the engine oil certi-
fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-
ber should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
There are a number of engine oils being promoted as
either synthetic or semi-synthetic. If you chose to use
such a product, use only those oils that are American
Petroleum Institute (API) Certified and have the recom-
mended SAE viscosity grade. Follow the maintenance
schedule that describes your driving type.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 273
Materials Added To Engine Oils
Engine Oil Filter Selection
The manufacture strongly recommends against the addi-
tion of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and
it’s performance may be impaired by supplemental ad-
ditives.
All of this manufacturers engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replace-
ment. The quality of replacement filters varies consider-
ably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. Mopar Engine Oil Filters are high
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Disposing of Used Engine Oil
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil from
your vehicle. Used oil, indiscriminately discarded, can
present a problem to the environment. Contact your
dealer, service station, or governmental agency for advice
on how and where used oil can be safely discarded in
your area.
Drive Belts — Check Condition and Tension
At the mileage shown in the maintenance schedules,
check all drive belts for condition and proper tension.
Improper belt tension can cause belt slippage and failure.
Inspect the drive belts for evidence of cuts, cracks, or
glazing and replace them if there is any sign of damage
which could result in belt failure. If adjustment is re-
quired, see your authorized dealer for service.
7
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
274 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Special tools are required to properly measure tension
and to restore belt tension to factory specifications. Also,
check belt routing to make sure there is no interference
between the belts and other engine components.
Catalytic Converter
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
Spark Plugs
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-
verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-
portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
Spark plugs must fire properly to assure engine perfor-
mance and emission control. New plugs should be in-
stalled at the specified mileage. The entire set should be
replaced if there is any malfunction due to a faulty spark
plug. Refer to the Engine data Label located under the
hood for the proper type of spark plug for use in your
vehicle.
Ignition Wiring System
The ignition cables should be kept clean and properly
connected. Terminals should be fully seated. Cracked,
damaged, or faulty cables should be replaced.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 275
WARNING!
CAUTION!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your ex-
haust system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in
areas where your exhaust system can contact any-
thing that can burn.
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involv-
ing engine misfire or other apparent loss of perfor-
mance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Contin-
ued operation of your vehicle with
a
severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune up to manufacturers specifica-
tions, should be obtained immediately.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
276 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
Check ventilation hose for indication of damage or
plugging deposits. Replace if necessary.
•
Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
Fuel Filter
A plugged fuel filter can cause hard starting or limit the
speed at which a vehicle can be driven. Should an
excessive amount of dirt accumulate in the fuel tank,
frequent filter replacement may be necessary. The fuel
filters are located inside the fuel tank. See your dealer for
service.
•
•
Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected for prolonged period.
Engine Timing Belt
Replace the engine timing belt at the intervals described
Air Cleaner Element (Filter)
Under normal driving conditions, replace the filter at the
intervals shown on Schedule “A”. If, however, you drive
the vehicle frequently under dusty or severe conditions,
the filter element should be inspected periodically and
replaced if necessary at the intervals shown on Schedule
“B”.
in the appropriate maintenance schedule.
Crankcase Emission Control System
Proper operation of this system depends on freedom
from sticking or plugging due to deposits. As vehicle
mileage builds up, the PCV valve and passages may
accumulate deposits. If a valve is not working properly,
replace it with a new valve. DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
CLEAN THE OLD PCV VALVE!
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 277
NOTE: For vehicles with a Turbo engine, a small
amount of oil accumulation in the air cleaner box is
normal. The amount will depend on driving style. The air
cleaner box should be cleaned out and a new make-up-
air filter element should be installed during the normal
air filter maintenance procedure.
Maintenance-Free Battery
You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-
tenance required.
CAUTION!
When servicing the battery, always reinstall the
battery thermowrap. The thermowrap provides bat-
tery heat protection and will extend overall battery
life. Failure to reinstall the thermowrap can result in
evaporative loss of the battery fluid.
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
278 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
CAUTION!
Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Don’t allow battery fluid to
contact your eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean over a
battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in
eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with
large amounts of water.
It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to the
negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+)
and negative (-) and identified on the battery case.
Cable clamps should be tight on the terminal posts
and free of corrosion. Apply grease to posts and
clamps after tightening.
Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep flame
or sparks away from the battery. Don’t use a booster
battery or any other booster source with an output
greater than 12 volts. Don’t allow cable clamps to
touch each other.
If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the
vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-
fore connecting the charger to battery. Do not use a
“fast charger” to provide starting voltage as battery
damage can result.
Battery posts, terminals and related accessories con-
tain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands after
handling.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 279
Air Conditioner Maintenance
WARNING!
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an Authorized Dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
•
•
Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-
tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer
to Section 3 of the Warranty Information book for
further warranty information.
The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
280 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery and Recycling
WARNING!
R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluorocar-
bon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental Pro-
tection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-
ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by dealers or other service facilities
using recovery and recycling equipment.
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to insure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturers recommended
power steering fluid.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/ C System
Sealers, Stop Leak Products, Seal Conditioners, Compres-
sor Oil, or Refrigerants.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants, and
Genuine Parts for correct fluid types.
Power Steering — Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
apparent, and/ or the system is not functioning as antici-
pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through a certified
DaimlerChrysler Dealership.Љ
Front Suspension Ball Joints
There are two front suspension lower ball joints that are
permanently lubricated. Inspect these ball joints when-
ever under vehicle service is done. Damaged seals and
their corresponding potentially damaged ball joints must
be replaced.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 281
Body Lubrication
Windshield Wiper Blades
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, doors,liftgate and hood hinges, should be
lubricated periodically to assure quiet, easy operation
and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the appli-
cation of any lubricant, the parts concerned should be
wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching compo-
nents to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild non abrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This
will remove accumulations of salt, waxes or road film
and help reduce streaking and smearing.
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
remove frost or ice from the windshield. make sure that
they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to
avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the fall and spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as Mopar Lock
Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
7
Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement
1. Lift the wiper arm away from the glass.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
282 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Push the release tab shown in the illustration and slide
the wiper blade assembly down along the arm. Gently
place the wiper arm on the windshield.
Windshield Washer Reservoir
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the rear of the
engine compartment on the passenger side and should be
checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the
reservoir with windshield washer solvent (not radiator
antifreeze).
3. Install the new blade assembly onto the wiper arm tip
until it locks in place.
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 283
Exhaust System
WARNING!
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide which is colorless and odorless. Breathing
it can make you unconscious and can eventually
poison you. Follow the above precautions to keep
your exhaust system as safe as possible.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system,
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle, or
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;
have a competent technician inspect the complete ex-
haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-
aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil
change or lubrication. Replace as required.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
284 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cooling System
applicable). If coolant is dirty or rusty in appearance, the
system should be drained, flushed and refilled with fresh
coolant. Check the front of the A/ C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
WARNING!
•
•
When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-
connect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rub-
ber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, don’t open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
With the engine at normal operating temperature (but
not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for
proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of
coolant from the radiator drain cock. If the cap is sealing
properly, the engine coolant (antifreeze) will begin to
drain from the coolant recovery bottle. DO NOT RE-
MOVE THE COOLANT PRESSURE CAP WHEN THE
COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12
months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 285
Cooling System — Drain, Flush and Refill
At the intervals shown on the Maintenance Schedules,
CAUTION!
the system should be drained, flushed and refilled.
Mixing of coolants other than specified HOAT en-
gine coolants, may result in engine damage and may
decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT cool-
ant is introduced into the cooling system in an
emergency, it should be replaced with the specified
coolant as soon as possible.
If the solution is dirty or contains a considerable amount
of sediment, clean and flush with a reliable cooling
system cleaner. Follow with a thorough rinsing to remove
all deposits and chemicals. Properly dispose of old
antifreeze solution.
Do not use plain water alone or alcohol base engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional
rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not
be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and
may plug the radiator.
Selection Of Coolant
Use only the manufacturers recommended coolant, refer
to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
for correct coolant type.
7
This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based coolants. Use of Propylene
Glycol based coolants is not recommended.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
286 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Adding Coolant
The use of lower quality water will reduce the amount of
corrosion protection in the engine cooling system.
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant that allows extended maintenance intervals. This
coolant can be used up to 5 Years or 100,000 miles before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended mainte-
nance period, it is important that you use the same
coolant throughout the life of your vehicle. Please review
these recommendations for using Hybrid Organic Addi-
tive Technology (HOAT) coolant.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to main-
tain the proper level of protection against freezing ac-
cording to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing coolant types will decrease the life of the
engine coolant and will require more frequent coolant
changes.
When adding coolant, a minimum solution of 50% rec-
ommended Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/ 100,000
Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Organic Additive Technol-
ogy), or equivalent, in water should be used. Use higher
concentrations (not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below
Ϫ34°F (Ϫ37°C ) are anticipated.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of
coolant, and to insure that coolant will return to the
radiator from the coolant recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/ engine coolant solution.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 287
do not store ethylene glycol based engine coolant in open
containers or allow it to remain in puddles on the
ground. If ingested by a child, contact a physician
immediately. Clean up any ground spills immediately.
WARNING!
•
•
The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety pre-
caution. Never add coolant when the engine is
overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to
cool an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure
to build up in the cooling system. To prevent
scalding or injury, do not remove the pressure cap
while the system is hot or under pressure.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling, and warm to normal operating tempera-
ture, the level of the coolant in the bottle should be
between the ranges indicated on the bottle.
Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or
engine damage may result.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
coolant freeze point or replacing coolant. Advise your
service attendant of this. As long as the engine operating
temperature is satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only
be checked once a month.
7
Disposal of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol based engine coolant is a regulated
substance requiring proper disposal. Check with your
local authorities to determine the disposal rules for your
community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
288 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When additional coolant is needed to maintain the
proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle. Do
not overfill.
•
•
•
Check coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the
coolant recovery bottle. If antifreeze needs to be
added, contents of coolant recovery bottle must also be
protected against freezing.
Points To Remember
If frequent coolant additions are required, or if the
level in the coolant recovery bottle does not drop when
the engine cools, the cooling system should be pres-
sure tested for leaks.
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles (a
few kilometers) of operation, you may observe vapor
coming from the front of the engine compartment. This is
normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-
ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot coolant to
enter the radiator.
Maintain coolant concentration at 50% HOAT engine
coolant (minimum) and distilled water for proper
corrosion protection of your engine which contains
aluminum components.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
•
•
Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
•
Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean, also.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 289
•
Do not change the thermostat for summer or winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory coolant performance, poor gas
mileage, and increased emissions.
Inspect all hose connections such as clamps and cou-
plings to make sure the are secure and no leaks are
present.
Components should be replaced immediately if there is
any evidence of degradation that could cause failure.
Hoses And Vacuum/Vapor Harnesses
Fuel System Connections
Inspect surfaces of hoses and nylon tubing for evidence
of heat and mechanical damage. Hard or soft spots,
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
sive swelling indicate deterioration of the rubber
Electronic Fuel Injection high pressure fuel systems are
designed with tubes and special connects, connections
and clamps which have unique material characteristics to
provide adequate sealing and resist attack by deterio-
rated gasoline.
Pay particular attention to the hoses nearest to high heat
sources such as the exhaust manifold. Inspect hose rout-
ing to be sure hoses do not touch any heat source or
moving component that may cause heat damage or
mechanical wear.
You are urged to use only the manufactures-specified
tubes, connections and clamps, or their equivalent in
material and specification, in any fuel system servicing.
7
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
290 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Brake System
Brake And Power Steering System Hoses
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Suggested service intervals can be found in the Mainte-
nance Section.
When servicing the vehicle for scheduled maintenance,
inspect the surface of the hoses and nylon tubing for
evidence of heat and mechanical damage. Hard and
brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts, abrasions, and exces-
sive swelling suggest deterioration of the rubber. Particu-
lar attention should be made to examining those hose
surfaces nearest to high heat sources, such as the exhaust
manifold.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You wouldn’t have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Inspect all hose clamps and couplings to make sure they
are secure and no leaks are present.
Insure nylon tubing in these areas has not melted or
collapsed.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 291
NOTE: Often, fluids such as oil, power steering fluid,
and brake fluid are used during assembly plant opera-
tions to ease the assembly of hoses to couplings. There-
fore, oil wetness at the hose-coupling area is not neces-
sarily an indication of leakage. Actual dripping of hot
fluid when systems are under pressure (during vehicle
operation) should be noted before a hose is replaced
based on leakage.
WARNING!
Worn brake hoses can burst and cause brake failure.
You could have an accident. If you see any signs of
cracking, scuffing, or worn spots, have the brake
hoses replaced immediately.
Brake Master Cylinder
NOTE: Inspection of brake hoses should be done when-
ever the brake system is serviced and at every engine oil
change.
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the brake system warning lamp is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. Brake fluid level should be checked
when pads are replaced. However, low fluid level may be
caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
292 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual
transaxle, the Brake Fluid Reservoir supplies fluid to both
the Brake System and the Clutch Release System. The
two systems are separated in the reservoir and a leak in
one system will not affect the other system. If the Brake
Fluid Reservoir is low, and the brake system does not
indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a result of
a leak in the Hydraulic Clutch Release System. See your
local authorized dealer for service.
Brake Fluid Master Cylinder
Use only manufacturers recommended brake fluid, refer
to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 293
Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate the
brake fluid as seal damage will result!
WARNING!
Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point or unidentified as to specification, may
result in sudden brake failure during hard pro-
longed braking. You could have an accident.
Automatic Transaxle
All front wheel drive vehicles have a transmission and
differential assembly contained within a single housing.
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance. Use
only manufacturers recommended transmission fluid,
refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine
Parts for correct fluid type. It is important that the
transmission fluid be maintained at the prescribed level
using the recommended fluid.
WARNING!
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
7
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
294 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Procedure For Checking Fluid Level
To properly check the automatic transaxle fluid level, the
CAUTION!
following procedure must be used:
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-
turers recommended fluid may cause deterioration
in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter
shudder. Using a transmission fluid other than the
manufacturers recommended fluid will result in
more frequent fluid and filter changes. Refer to
Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
for correct fluid type.
1. The vehicle must be on level ground.
2. The engine should be running at curb idle speed for at
minimum of 60 seconds.
3. Fully apply parking brake.
4. Place the gear selector momentarily in each gear
position ending with the lever in P (PARK).
5. Remove the dipstick and determine if the fluid is hot
or warm. Hot fluid is approximately 180°F (82°C), which
is the normal operating temperature after the vehicle has
been driven at least 24 km (15 miles). The fluid cannot be
comfortable held between the finger tips. Warm is when
the fluid is between 85° to 125°F (29° to 52°C).
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be
checked whenever the vehicle is serviced. Operation with
an improper fluid level will greatly reduce the life of the
transaxle and of the fluid.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 295
If the fluid is cold, the fluid level should be between the
lower two holes, into the area marked “LOW”.
If the fluid level shows low, add sufficient transmission
fluid to bring to the proper level.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill. Dirt and water in the transaxle can
cause serious damage. To prevent dirt and water
from entering the transaxle after checking or replen-
ishing fluid, make certain that the dipstick cap is
seated properly.
Transaxle Dipstick Location
7
6. Wipe the dipstick clean and reinsert until seated.
Remove dipstick and note reading.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Automatic transmission fluid and filter should be
changed as follows:
If the fluid is hot, reading should be in the cross hatched
area marked “HOT” between the upper two holes in the
dipstick.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
296 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintenance schedule “A”—Non Turbo Charged En-
Special Additives
gines – No change necessary.
The manufacturer recommends against the addition of
any fluid additives to the transaxle. The only exception to
this policy is the use of special dyes to aid in detecting
fluid leaks. The use of transmission sealers should be
avoided as they may adversely affect seals.
Maintenance schedule “A”—Turbo Charged Engines –
No change necessary.
Maintenance schedule “B”—All Engines – Every 60,000
miles (96 000 km) change fluid and filter under the
following conditions:
Manual Transaxle
Lubricant Selection
•
Police, taxi, limousine, commercial type operation, or
trailer towing where the vehicle is driven regularly for
more than 45 minutes of continuous operation.
Use only manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid, refer to Recommended Fluids, Lubricants and
Genuine Parts for correct fluid type.
NOTE: Refer to Section 8 of this manual for mainte-
nance schedules.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more that 3/ 16” (4.7 mm) below the bottom of
the hole.
If the transaxle is disassembled for any reason, the fluid
and filter should be changed.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 297
Frequency Of Fluid Change
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and under-
body protection.
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless the
following conditions exist:
•
The lubricant has become contaminated with water. If
contaminated with water, the fluid should be changed
immediately.
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
•
If severe usage has occurred, refer to Maintenance
Schedule “B” in Section 8 of this manual.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
The most common causes are:
7
Protection Of Body And Paint from Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-
graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice, and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
•
•
•
•
Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
Stone and gravel impact.
Insects, tree sap and tar.
Salt in the air near sea coast localities.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
298 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
•
Atmospheric fallout/ industrial pollutants.
CAUTION!
Washing
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials
such as steel wool or scouring powder, which will
scratch metal and painted surfaces.
•
Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-
hicle in the shade using a mild car wash soap, and
rinse the panels completely with clear water.
•
•
If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumu-
lated on your vehicle, wash it as soon as possible.
Special Care
•
•
•
If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
Use Mopar auto polish to remove road film and stains
and to polish your vehicle. Take care never to scratch
the paint.
It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and rear deck lid be kept
clear and open.
•
Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 299
•
•
Use Mopar touch up paint on scratches or chips as
soon as possible. Your dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
CAUTION!
If your vehicle is equipped with flame or woodgrain
graphics, it is recommended that special care be
taken when using hand-held pressure washers to
clean your vehicle. The pressure of these hand-held
car wash wands can vary greatly and could possibly
cause damage to the surface of the graphic. Hold the
tip of the wand at least 12 inches away from the
graphic surface when cleaning the vehicle.
If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible.
The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibil-
ity of the owner.
•
•
If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
deicer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
7
All wheels and wheel trim, especially Aluminum and
Chrome plated, should be cleaned regularly, when cool,
using mild soap and water to maintain their luster and to
prevent corrosion. Wash them with the same soap solu-
tion as the body of your vehicle. Rinse wheels thor-
oughly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
300 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When cleaning extremely dirty wheels, care must be
taken in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning chemi-
cals and equipment to prevent damage to the wheels.
Only Mopar Wheel Cleaners are recommended. DO NOT
USE any of the items listed below which can damage
your wheels and wheel trim.
CAUTION!
Many wheel cleaners contain acids that may harm
the wheel surface.
NOTE: Replacement costs for components damaged as
a result of not following the recommended cleaning
practices are considered the responsibility of the cus-
tomer.
DO NOT USE:
•
•
Any abrasive cleaner
Any abrasive cleaning pad (such as steel wool) or
abrasive brush
Interior Care
Use Mopar Fabric Cleaner to clean fabric upholstery and
•
Any cleaner that contains an acid which can react with
and discolor the chrome surface.
carpeting.
Use Mopar Vinyl Cleaner to clean vinyl upholstery and
vinyl trim.
•
•
•
Chrome polish
Oven cleaner
Mopar Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
A car wash that uses carbide-tipped wheel cleaning
brushes or acidic solutions.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 301
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and Mopar Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-
gents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-
lowed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
WARNING!
7
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
302 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Glass Surfaces
1. Clean with a wet soft rag. A mild soap solution may be
used, but do not use high alcohol content of abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean damp
rag.
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with any commercial household-type glass cleaner.
Never use an abrasive type cleaner. Use caution when
cleaning inside rear windows equipped with electric
defrosters. Do not use scrapers or other sharp instru-
ments which may scratch the elements.
2. Dry with a soft tissue.
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage will also weaken the fabric.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections in the windshield. Do not use
protectants or other products which may cause undesir-
able reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
low glare surface.
If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the
vehicle to wash them.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in the vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the
buckles do not work properly.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 303
FUSES
MAXI
FUSE
Amp/Color
Items Fused
Underhood Fuses (Power Distribution Center)
A Power Distribution Center is located in the engine
compartment; next to the air cleaner filter. A label iden-
tifying the components and circuits is located on the
underside of the cover.
1
2
30 Amp/ Pink Ignition Start
40 Amp/ Green Anti-Lock Brake (ABS)
Pump
3
4
5
40 Amp/ Green Ignition Run
30 Amp/ Pink Heated Seats
40 Amp/ Green Radiator Fan (Lo Speed
Turbo Only)
6
7
50 Amp/ Red
High Speed Radiator Fan
(Turbo Only)
30 Amp/ Pink Anti-Lock Brake (ABS)
Solenoid
7
8
9
40 Amp/ Green Electric Back Light (EBL)
Spare
10
40 Amp/ Green IP Fuseblock
Power Distribution Center Location
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
304 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
MINI
FUSE
11
Amp/Color
Items Fused
22
Spare
Interior Fuses
10 Amp/ Red
Air Conditioning (A/ C)
The fuse access panel is on the left side of the instrument
panel next to the steering column. To remove the panel,
pull it out, as shown. A label identifying the components
and circuits is located on the inside of the cover.
12
13
15 Amp/ Blue Stop Lights
20 Amp/
Yellow
Fuel Pump/ Auto Shut
Down (ASD)
14
15
15 Amp/ Blue Horn
20 Amp/
Yellow
Electronic Automatic
Transaxle (ETAX)
16
17
15 Amp/ Blue Hi Beam
20 Amp/
Yellow
IOD
18
19
15 Amp/ Blue Hazard Flasher
20 Amp/
Yellow
Power Outlet
20
21
Spare
20 Amp/
Yellow
Fog Lights (Build-Up Ex-
port Only)
Interior Fuse Panel
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 305
FUSE
Amp/Color
25 Amp/
Natural
Items Fused
Headlamp Switch
11
10 Amp/ Red Engine Module/ ABS-
TRAC
1
12
13
14
10 Amp/ Red PDC Relays/ LDP
10 Amp/ Red Interior Lighting
2
3
15 Amp/ Blue Exterior Lighting
20 Amp/
Yellow
RKE/ Door Locks
20 Amp/
Yellow
Sunroof/ Overhead
Console/ Radio
4
20 Amp/
Yellow
Power Height Adjust
15
16
20 Amp/
Yellow
Wipers/ Comb. FLS
5
6
10 Amp/ Red Airbag Run Only
10 Amp/ Red Auto Stick/ Ignition Off/
Run
10 Amp/ Red B/ U Electric Back Light
(EBL) NEU SAF
17
18
19
20
15 Amp/ Blue Heated Seats
10 Amp/ Red Heated Mirrors
10 Amp/ Red Rt Headlamp
10 Amp/ Red Lt Headlamp
7
8
25 Amp/
Natural
HVAC Blower
7
15 Amp/ Blue Fog Lamp (Domestic
Only)
9
10 Amp/ Red Airbag Run-ST
10
10 Amp/ Red Cluster/ RKE/ SKIM
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
306 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
REPLACEMENT BULBS
CAUTION!
When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use
only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The
use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may
result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a
properly rated fuse continues to blow, it shows a
problem in the circuit that must be corrected.
LIGHT BULBS — Inside
Bulb No.
ABS Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Airbag Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Brake System Warning Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Center Console Floor Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T37
Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6233137
Console Gear Selector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PC194
Cruise Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VFD *
Dome Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T579
Door Ajar Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VFD *
Front Fog Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Instrument Cluster Illumination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Liftgate Ajar Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Low Fuel Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Low Oil Pressure Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than 21
days you may want to take steps to preserve your battery.
You may:
•
•
Disengage the mini fuse in the Power Distribution
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
Or, disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 307
Overhead Reading Light (Overhead Console) . . . T1037
Overhead Reading Light (Rearview Mirror) . . . . . T192
Rear Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T906
Seat Belt Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Security Alarm Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Malfunction Indicator Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Temperature Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Trac (Active) Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VFD *
TRAC OFF Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
Trip Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . VFD *
Turn Signal Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Visor Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6501966
Voltage Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED
LIGHTS BULBS — Outside
Bulb No.
Low Beam Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006XS
High Beam Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9005XS
Front Park/ Turn Signal/ Side Marker
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4157NAKX
Front Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9006
Center High Mounted Stop Light
(CHMSL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 921–W16W
Rear Tail/ Stop/ Turn Signal Light . . . . . . 3157–P27/7W
Backup Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157-P27/7W
License Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
7
NOTE: * Vacuum Fluorescent Display
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
be used for replacement.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
308 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlight Bulb Replacement
CAUTION!
Do not touch the new headlight bulb with your
fingers. Oil contamination will severely shorten
bulb life.
1. Remove the headlight access cover splash shield,
located in the front wheel well opening.
3. Rotate the socket to the left one quarter turn and
replace the bulb.
2. Disconnect the electrical connector.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 309
Front Park/Turn Signal/Side Marker Lights
Front Fog Lights — If Equipped
1. Remove the headlight access cover splash shield,
located in the front wheel well opening.
1. Remove the fasteners attaching the lower splash
shield to gain access to the fog light.
2. Rotate the socket to the left one quarter turn to replace
and replace the bulb.
2. Twist and remove the bulb from the fog light housing.
3. Disconnect the electrical connector and replace bulb.
Tail/Stop, and Rear Turn Signal Lights
1. Remove the screw attaching the tail light housing and
remove the housing from the vehicle.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
310 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Twist the bulb socket 1/ 4 turn to remove it from the
housing.
Back Up Light Bulb
1. Remove the screws attaching the back up light to the
rear fascia and remove the housing.
2. Remove the socket from the housing.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace.
Center High Mounted Stop Light
1. Open the liftgate and remove the liftgate CHMSL
cover.
2. Remove CHMSL lens from the housing by unlatching
the two side latches.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace.
3. Pull the bulb out of the socket and replace.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 311
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
U.S.
Metric
Fuel (Approximate)
15 Gallons
56.7 Liters
Engine Oil-With Filter
2.4 Liter Engines (Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil.
Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade meet-
ing DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.)
5.0 qts
6.5 qts
4.7 Liters
6.2 Liters
Cooling System *
2.4 Liter Engines (Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/ 100,000
Miles Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
312 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
RECOMMENDED FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts
Engine Coolant
Mopar Antifreeze/ Coolant 5 Year/ 100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid Or-
ganic Additive Technology) or equivalent.
Engine Oil
Use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil. Refer to your engine oil filler cap
for correct SAE grade meeting DaimlerChrysler Material Standard MS-6395.
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Non Turbo—Mopar 4105409 or equiv. Turbo—Mopar 4781452AA or equiv.
Refer to the Vehicle Emission Control Information label in the engine com-
partment.
Fuel Selection
91 Octane for High Output 2.4L Turbo and 87 Octane for 2.4L Standard
Turbo and 2.4L Standard Non Turbo Engines.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 313
Chassis
Component
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts.
Automatic Transmission Fluid.
Manual Transmission Fluid.
Brake Master Cylinder
Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
Mopar DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids or equivalent.
Power Steering Reservoir
Mopar ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid or equivalent.
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
316 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The “Scheduled” maintenance services, listed in bold
type must be done at the times or mileages specified to
assure the continued proper functioning of the emission
control system. These, and all other maintenance services
included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent main-
tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
conditions such as dusty areas and very short trip
driving.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
There are three maintenance schedules that show re-
quired service for your vehicle.
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
First is Schedule “B”—ALL ENGINES. It is for vehicles
that are operated under the conditions that are listed
below and at the beginning of the schedule.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Day and night temperatures are below 32° F (0° C).
Stop and go driving.
S
C
H
E
Extensive engine idling.
D
U
L
Inspection and service also should be done any time a
malfunction is suspected.
Driving in dusty conditions.
E
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement, or repair of the emis-
sion control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part which has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or, in the State of Califor-
nia, California Air Resources Board regulations.
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16 km).
S
8
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C).
•
Trailer towing.†छ
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 317
•
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial ser-
vice).†छ
Second is Schedule “A”—NON TURBO. It is for vehicles
that are not operated under any of the conditions listed
under Schedule ЉBЉ—ALL ENGINES.
N
T
E
•
•
Off-road or desert operation.
N
A
N
C
E
Third is Schedule “A”—TURBO. It is for vehicles that are
not operated under any of the conditions listed under
Schedule ЉBЉ—ALL ENGINES.
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first, and follow schedule “B—All
Engines” of the ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this
manual.
Use the schedule that best describes your driving condi-
tions. Where time and mileage are listed, follow the
interval that occurs first.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
CAUTION!
NOTE: IF ANY of these apply to you then flush and
replace the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (164,000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow
schedule “B—All Engines” of the ЉMaintenance Sched-
ulesЉ section of this manual.
E
S
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
8
NOTE: Most vehicles are operated under the conditions
listed for Schedule ЉBЉ—ALL ENGINES.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
318 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
At Each Stop for Fuel
•
•
Check all lights and all other electrical items for correct
operation.
N
T
•
Check the engine oil level about 5 minutes after a fully
warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level while
the vehicle is on level ground will improve the accu-
racy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when the
level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
E
Check rubber seals on each side of the radiator for
proper fit.
N
A
N
C
E
At Each Oil Change
•
•
•
•
Change the engine oil filter.
Inspect the exhaust system.
Inspect the brake hoses.
•
Check the windshield washer solvent and add if
required.
S
C
H
E
Once a Month
D
U
L
•
•
•
Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
Inspect the CV joints and front suspension compo-
nents.
E
S
Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
•
•
Check the automatic transaxle fluid level.
8
Check the manual transaxle fluid level and fill plug
condition.
Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder and transaxle and add as needed.
•
Check the coolant level, hoses, and clamps.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES 319
SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES
Follow schedule “B”—All Engines if you usually operate
your vehicle under one or more of the following condi-
tions.
•
More than 50% of your driving is at sustained high
speeds during hot weather, above 90° F (32° C ).
N
T
E
•
•
Trailer towing.†छ
N
A
N
C
E
Taxi, police, or delivery service (commercial ser-
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter every
60,000 miles (96 000 km) if the vehicle is usually operated
under one or more of the conditions marked with an छ.
vice).†छ
•
•
Off-road or desert operation.
S
C
H
E
Change the manual transaxle fluid every 48,000 miles (77
000 km) if the vehicle is usually operated under one or
more of the conditions marked with an †.
If equipped for and operating with E-85 (ethanol)
fuel.
D
U
L
NOTE: If ANY of these apply to you then change your
engine oil every 3,000 miles (5 000 km) or 3 months,
whichever comes first, and follow schedule “B—All
Engines” of the ЉMaintenance SchedulesЉ section of this
manual.
•
•
•
•
•
Day and night temperatures are below32° F (0° C).
Stop and go driving.
E
S
8
Extensive engine idling.
Driving in dusty conditions.
Short trips of less than 10 miles (16.2 km).
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
320 SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES
NOTE: IF ANY of these apply to you then flush and
replace the engine coolant every 102,000 miles (164,000
km) or 60 months, whichever comes first, and follow
schedule “B—All Engines” of the ЉMaintenance Sched-
ulesЉ section of this manual.
schedule “A”—NON TURBO in the maintenance sched-
ule section of this manual.
N
T
E
If none of these apply to you, and your vehicle is
equipped with a Turbo Charged Engine change your
engine oil at every interval shown on schedule
“A”—TURBO in the maintenance schedule section of this
manual.
N
A
N
C
E
If none of these apply to you, and your vehicle is
equipped with a Non–Turbo Charged Engine then
change your engine oil at every interval shown on
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES 321
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
3,000
(5 000)
X
6,000
9,000
12,000
15,000
18,000
(29 000)
X
N
T
(10 000) (14 000) (19 000) (24 000)
E
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
Rotate tires.
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace as
necessary.*
X
X
S
C
H
E
Inspect the Make-up air filter, replace as nec-
essary.
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
322 SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
21,000
24,000
27,000
30,000
33,000
36,000
(58 000)
X
N
T
(34 000) (38 000) (43 000) (48 000) (53 000)
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
Rotate tires.
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs.
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
D
U
L
Inspect the PCV valve and replace as neces-
sary.*
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
X
X
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES 323
Miles
( Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
39,000
42,000
45,000
48,000
51,000
54,000
(86 000)
X
N
T
(62 000) (67 000) (72 000) (77 000) (82 000)
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
Rotate tires.
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings.
Change the brake fluid. If vehicle is used for
trailer towing.
S
C
H
E
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter, replace as
necessary.*
X
X
D
U
L
Change the manual transaxle fluid.†
X
Inspect the Make-up air filter. Replace as nec-
essary.
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
324 SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES
Miles
( Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not
replaced at 3 months.
57,000
60,000
63,000
66,000
69,000
72,000
N
T
(91 000) (96 000) (101 000) (106 000) (111 000) (115 000)
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
Rotate tires.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if neces-
sary. Not required if previously changed. * ‡
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
X
X
X
E
S
8
Change the automatic transaxle fluid and fil-
ter.छ
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60
months, if not done at 102,000 miles.
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES 325
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re-
placed at 3 months.
75,000
78,000
81,000
84,000
87,000
90,000
N
T
(120 000) (125 000) (130 000) (135 000) (130 000) (144 000)
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
N
A
N
C
E
Rotate tires.
X
X
Inspect the brake linings.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace as
necessary.*
S
C
H
E
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
X
X
X
D
U
L
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary.
Not required if previously changed. * ‡
E
X
X
S
Replace the engine timing belt. *
8
Inspect the Make-up air filter, replace as necessary.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
Replace the Make-up air filter.
X
X
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
326 SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re-
placed at 3 months.
93,000
(150 000)
X
96,000
(154 000)
X
99,000
(159 000)
X
102,000
(164 000)
X
105,000
(168 000)
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
Rotate tires.
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings.
Change the brake fluid. If vehicle is used for trailer
towing.
S
C
H
E
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter and replace as
necessary.*
X
X
D
U
L
Change the manual transaxle fluid.†
X
Flush and replace the engine coolant, if not replaced
at 60 months.
X
E
S
Inspect the Make-up air filter, replace as necessary.
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES 327
Miles
(Kilometers)
Change engine oil and engine oil filter, if not re-
placed at 3 months.
108,000
(173 000)
X
111,000
(178 000)
X
114,000
(183 000)
X
117,000
(188 000)
X
120,000
(193 000)
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
Rotate tires.
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter. *
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
Change automatic transaxle fluid and filter.छ
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary. *‡
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months,
if not replaced at 102,000 miles.
X
X
8
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
328 SCHEDULE “B”—ALL ENGINES
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis-
sions warranty.
छ This maintenance is required only for police, taxi,
limousine type operation, or trailer towing.
N
T
E
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
ceipts.
N
A
N
C
E
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
† This maintenance is required only for police, taxi,
limousine type operation, or trailer towing.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “A”—NON TURBO 329
SCHEDULE “A”—NON TURBO
N
T
Miles
(Kilometers )
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
6,000
(10 000)
[6]
12,000
18,000
24,000
30,000
36,000
E
(19 000) (29 000) (38 000) (48 000) (58 000)
N
A
N
C
E
[12]
X
[18]
X
[24]
X
[30]
X
[36]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
X
X
X
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
330 SCHEDULE “A”—NON TURBO
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
42,000
(67 000)
[42]
48,000
(77 000)
[48]
54,000
(86 000)
[54]
X
60,000
(96 000)
[60]
66,000
(106 000)
[66]
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Inspect the PCV valve and replace, if necessary.*
X
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months, if
not done at 102,000 miles.
E
S
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
X
X
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “A”—NON TURBO 331
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
72,000
78,000
84,000
90,000
96,000
102,000
N
T
(115 000) (125 000) (134 000) (144 000) (154 000) (164 000)
E
[72]
X
[78]
X
[84]
X
[90]
X
[96]
X
[102]
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
D
U
L
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary.
Not required if previously changed. * ‡
X
E
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
X
X
S
8
Flush and replace the engine coolant, if not
replaced at 60 months.
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
332 SCHEDULE “A”—NON TURBO
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
108,000
(173 000)
[108]
X
114,000
(182 000)
[114]
X
120,000
(192 000)
[120]
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary. * ‡
Replace the air cleaner filter.
Replace the engine timing belt. *
Flush and replace the engine coolant at 120 months, if not done at
102,000 miles.
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
D
U
L
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables.
Replace the Make-up air filter.
X
X
E
S
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis-
sions warranty.
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
ceipts.
8
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “A”—TURBO 333
SCHEDULE “A”—TURBO
N
T
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
5,000
(8 000)
[6]
10,000
15,000
20,000
25,000
30,000
E
(16 000) (24 000) (32 000) (40 000) (48 000)
N
A
N
C
E
[12]
X
[18]
X
[24]
X
[30]
X
[36]
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
X
X
X
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
334 SCHEDULE “A”—TURBO
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
35,000
(56 000)
[42]
40,000
(64 000)
[48]
X
45,000
(72 000)
[54]
50,000
(80 000)
[60]
55,000
(88 000)
[66]
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings.
X
Flush and replace engine coolant at 60 months, if not
replaced at 100,000 miles.
S
C
H
E
X
D
U
L
E
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “A”—TURBO 335
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
60,000
65,000
70,000
75,000
80,000
85,000
N
T
(96 000) (104 000) (112 000) (120 000) (128 000) (136 000)
E
[72]
X
[78]
X
[84]
X
[90]
X
[96]
X
[102]
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
X
D
U
L
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary.
Not required if previously changed. * ‡
X
E
Replace the Make-up air filter.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
X
X
S
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
336 SCHEDULE “A”—TURBO
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Months]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
90,000
(144 000)
[108]
X
95,000
100,000
105,000
N
T
(156 000) (160 000) (168 000)
[114]
X
E
[120]
X
[126]
X
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
X
Inspect the brake linings.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs.
Adjust the generator drive belt tension.
Inspect the tie rod ends and boot seals.
X
X
X
X
X
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
Inspect the PCV valve and replace if necessary. Not required if
previously changed. * ‡
X
E
S
Flush and replace the engine coolant if not done at 60 months.
Replace the Make-up air filter.
X
8
X
Replace the engine timing belt.
X
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
M
A
I
SCHEDULE “A”—TURBO 337
Miles
(Kilometers)
[Month]
Change engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
110,000
(177 000)
[132]
X
115,000
(185 000)
[138]
X
120,000
(193 000)
[144]
X
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
X
X
X
Inspect the PCV Valve and replace if necessary. *
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Replace the spark plugs and ignition cables.
X
X
S
C
H
E
X
* This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner but is not required to maintain the emis-
sions warranty.
WARNING!
D
U
L
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-
chanic.
E
‡ This maintenance is not required if previously replaced.
S
8
Inspection and service should also be performed anytime
a malfunction is observed or suspected. Retain all re-
ceipts.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
340 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items, and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many dealers you may obtain a rental vehicle at a
minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it is advisable
to make these arrangements when you call for an ap-
pointment.
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty, discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its dealers are vitally interested in
your satisfaction. We want you to be happy with our
products and services.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident,
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 341
Warranty service must be done by an authorized
Chrysler, Dodge, or Jeep dealer. We strongly recommend
that you take your vehicle to you selling dealer. They
know you and your vehicle best, and are most concerned
that you get prompt and high quality service. The
manufacturer’s dealers have the facilities, factory-trained
technicians, special tools, and the latest information to
assure your vehicle is fixed correctly and in a timely
manner.
•
If your dealership is unable to resolve the concern, you
may contact the Manufacturer’s Customer Center.
Any communication to the Manufacturer’s Customer
Center should include the following information:
•
•
•
•
•
Owner’s name and address
Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
Dealership name
This is why you should always talk to your dealer’s
service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with
this process.
Vehicle identification number
Vehicle delivery date and mileage
DaimlerChrysler Motors Corporation Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
•
If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the dealership. They
want to know if you need assistance.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
342 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
DaimlerChrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
(TTY) in the United States can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone —(800) 465–2001
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for your
vehicle to help protect you from the high cost of unex-
pected repairs after your manufacturer’s new vehicle
limited warranty expires. The manufacturer stands be-
hind only the manufacturer’s Service Contracts. If you
purchased a manufacturer’s Service Contract, you will
receive Plan Provisions and an Owner Identification Card
in the mail within three weeks of your vehicle delivery
date. If you have any questions about your service
contract, call the manufacturer’s Service Contract Na-
tional Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico (915) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Outside Mexico (525) 729–1248 or 729–1240
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-
cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its Customer
Center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 343
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s Service Contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s Service Contract. If you purchased a
service contract that is not a manufacturer’s Service
Contract, and you require service after your manufactur-
er’s new vehicle limited warranty expires, please refer to
your contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
WARRANTY INFORMATION
See your manufacturer’s Warranty Information Booklet
for information on warranty coverage and transfer of
warranty.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased your new vehicle. Your dealer has
also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
your ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
344 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
U.S. ONLY
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 345
MOPARா PARTS
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1-800-424-9393 (or 366-0123 in Wash-
ington DC area) or write to: NHTSA, U.S. Dept. of
Transportation, Washington DC 20590. You can also
obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from
the Hotline.
Mopar fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from your dealer. They will help you keep your
vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In the 50 United States and Washington D.C.: If you
believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause
a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administra-
tion (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.
In Canada:
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department imme-
diately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your dealer, and the
manufacturer.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
346 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
•
•
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals.
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-
tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-
cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
Filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations,
these practical manuals make it easy for students and
technicians to find and fix problems on computer-
controlled vehicle systems and features. They show
exactly how to find and correct problems the first time,
using step-by-step troubleshooting and driveability
procedures, proven diagnostic tests and a complete list
of all tools and equipment.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals. (No P.O. Boxes).
•
Service Manuals.
Owner’s Manuals.
These comprehensive service manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/ troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing and repairing DaimlerChrysler
Corporation vehicles. A complete working knowledge
of the vehicle, system and/ or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams
and charts.
These manuals have been prepared with the assistance
of service and engineering specialists to acquaint you
with specific Chrysler group vehicles. Included are
starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-
cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and
safety tips.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 347
Call Toll Free at 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.) or 1–800–387–1143
Treadwear
(Canada)
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the
wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled con-
ditions on a specified government test course. For ex-
ample, a tire graded 150 would wear one and a half (1
1/ 2) times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to variations
in driving habits, service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Or
Visit us on the World Wide Web at:
www.techauthority.daimlerchrysler.com or
www.daimlerchrysler.ca/manuals
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following describes the tire grading categories estab-
lished by the National highway Traffic Safety Adminis-
tration. The specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s
manufacturer in each category is shown on the sidewall
of the tires on your car.
Traction Grades
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are A, B, and
C, and they represent the tire’s ability to stop on wet
pavement as measured under controlled conditions on
specified government test surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-
mance.
All Passenger Car Tires Must Conform to Federal Safety
Requirements in Addition to These Grades.
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
348 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
WARNING!
WARNING!
The traction grade is based on braking (straight-
ahead) traction tests and does not include cornering
(turning) performance.
The temperature grade is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup
and possible tire failure.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (highest), B, and C, repre-
senting the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat and
its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the
tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C
corresponds to a level of performance which all passen-
ger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel
than the minimum required by law.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
350 INDEX
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 351
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143,204
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
352 INDEX
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Compass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311,312
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 353
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Electronic Speed Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
354 INDEX
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264,265
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269,311,312
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 355
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235,311
Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
356 INDEX
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 357
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97,143,309
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62,94
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47,52,62,142
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
358 INDEX
Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Central . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 359
Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272,311
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 272
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
360 INDEX
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Outlet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213,280
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Rear Seat Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 361
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Reclining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 363
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62,224,347
Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 233
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216,224
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
364 INDEX
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,196,199,293
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13,196,205
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
INDEX 365
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98,281
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
NOTES
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
|
